Thank you for choosing Mahindra vehicle.
We are privileged to welcome you to the Mahindra family.
Your vehicle represents Robust Quality, Ruggedness, Safety, Precision
Workmanship and Distinctive Styling , which are our
traditional values.
This documents contains important information on vehicle operation,
that will help you make full use of the technical features
available. To exercise better control on road, we suggest you to please take time to read, understand
and familiarise with
vehicle and its features. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable
operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, note that your Mahindra Authorised Dealer
knows your vehicle best, has company trained Technical
Experts, Mahindra Genuine Parts and very much cares about your satisfaction.
We extend our best wishes for safe and pleasurable motoring
MAHINDRA & MAHINDRA LTD.
| Important Information – Quick Reference | |
|
We
strongly urge that you read the information provided in pages referred
hereunder which will help in road safety and prevent
inconvenience
|
|
1
|
Warranty
Coverage.............................................................................................
|
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 15)
|
|
2
|
Roadside Assistance
....................................................................................
|
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 11)
|
|
3
|
Schedule Service
(Free/Paid).................................................................
|
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 24)
|
|
4
|
Maintenance Schedule
Chart.................................................................................
|
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 26)
|
|
5
|
Lubricants And
Capacities.............................................................................
|
Refer WSIG* (P.g. 28)
|
|
6
|
Location Of Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 1-8)
|
|
7
|
Location Of Fuse Box And Fuse
Details............................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 10-10)
|
|
8
|
Changing A Flat
Tyre................................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 10-16)
|
|
9
|
Understanding The Warning
Lamps..........................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 3-31)
|
|
10
|
Use Of Seat Belts And Child
Restraint......................................
|
Refer (P.g. 2-9 & 2-17)
|
|
11
|
Understanding The Airbag
Function.........................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 2-21)
|
|
12
|
If Your Vehicle Is
Submerged.....................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 8-9)
|
|
13
|
Driving Through
Water..................................................................................
|
Refer (P.g. 8-9)
|
|
14
|
Opening And Closing the
Bonnet.........................................
|
Refer (P.g. 5-31)
|
|
15
|
Location Of Battery And Its
Maintenance.....................................
|
Refer (P.g. 11-16)
|
|
*Warranty and
Service Information Guide
|
1 GENERAL AND SAFETY PRECAUTION
1.1 Servicing and Summary Data
We suggest that you record the vehicle servicing data in the
Warranty and
Service Information Guide for future references
We recommend you always use Mahindra Genuine Parts when performing
repairs on the vehicle.
For all issues concerning the vehicle and for any need of Genuine
spare
parts, contact the Mahindra Authorised Dealer
1.2 Safety Symbols
Carefully read, understand and follow the safety symbols/
instructions
given in this manual.
Legend of the Symbols
To emphasis the information and procedures regarding safety, use,
maintenance, etc., the following symbols are used throughout
the manual:
DANGER indicates an
imminently
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result
in death or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a
potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result
in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a
potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result
in minor or moderate injury and/or property damage.
NOTICE indicates important
information relevant to the vehicle, the vehicle's use or to sections of this manual to which
particular
attention must be paid for optimum use of the vehicle.
|
If you see this symbol, it indicates “no,” “ do
not,” “do
not do this,” or “never”.
|
|
1.3 General Safety Information and
Instructions
| 1. | Carefully read, understand and follow the warnings and instructions given in this manual. This manual is an essential part of the product. Keep it in the vehicles glove box for future reference |
| 2. | First-aid kit is placed in the glove box of the vehicle. Ensure it is not taken out of the vehicle at any point of time. |
| 3. | Never use mobile phone while driving. This may take your focus off the road and lead to accidents |
| 4. | Please be advised that many service and repair tasks require specialized knowledge, tools and experience. General mechanical skill set may not be sufficient to properly service or repair your vehicle. If you have any doubt whatsoever regarding the ability to properly service or repair your vehicle, please contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer |
| 5. | Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays or wear in the seat belt webbing, or loose buckles, retractors, anchors or other loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. |
| 6. | Examine tyres for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread and check sidewalls for any cuts, cracks, or other signs of wear. Replace as necessary |
| 7. | Always maintain the safety labels affixed to your vehicle in a good legible condition |
| 8. | All signal lamps, buzzers, shields, guards and other protective safety devices must always remain in place and in good, proper working condition |
| 9. | The lifespan of Mahindra products depends on many factors. Improper use, abuse or harsh use in general may compromise the integrity of the vehicle and significantly reduce its lifespan. The vehicle is also subject to wear over a period of time. Please have your vehicle regularly inspected by a Mahindra Authorised Dealer or a qualified Technician . If the inspection reveals any damage or excessive wear, immediately replace, or have the component serviced. |
| 10. | We recommend that you use only genuine parts supplied by Mahindra. The use of non-Mahindra parts will not be covered by warranty |
| 11. | Never crawl under or be in close proximity to the vehicle when it is lifted off the ground (by a jack), unless the vehicle is properly supported with jack stands, wheel chocks and other appropriate safety devices |
| 12. | Never attempt any repairs or adjustments to any component while the vehicle is in motion. Always stop the vehicle and wait for come to complete stop before performing any repairs or adjustments |
| 13. | The vehicle identification plates are the only legal identification reference, hence it is necessary to keep them in good condition. Never modify data on the plates or remove them. The customer is responsible for any possible tampering with the plates, which will immediately void the warranty |
| 14. | Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When the vehicle is fully loaded, drive at a slow speed, especially when turning. Note that the center of gravity of the vehicle changes when the vehicle is fully loaded, and also if luggage is mounted on the roof carrier. |
1.4 To Users of a Mahindra Vehicle
When first driving the vehicle after long periods of non-usage, you
may
experience a temporary drive disturbance. This is
a characteristic of the tyres and should be no reason for concern. The condition should correct
itself
within 5-15 kilometers.
of driving. If the disturbance persists, have the vehicle checked by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Driving and Alcohol:
Your
driving ability can be seriously impaired by alcohol even if the blood alcohol level is far below
the
legal minimum.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Never drink and drive. Drinking and driving may lead to an
accident
Driving and
Drugs/Medication
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired through the use of
prescription or non-prescription drugs or medication (even
cough syrup). If you are taking any sort of drug or medication, be sure that it will not affect
your
driving ability.
Mobile Phones Warning
Use of electronic devices such as mobile phones, handheld devices,
computers, portable radios or other by the driver while
driving is dangerous. In exceptional condition, if use of a mobile phone is necessary despite this
warning, use a hands-free
system to ensure that the hands are free to drive the vehicle. Even hands-free do not ensure
distraction
free drive. Please
comply with the legal regulations in your country, concerning the use of communication equipment in
vehicles .
Driving Long Distances
When driving long distances, follow these tips to have a safe
journey:
| • | Take breaks at regular intervals |
| • | Lack of sleep or fatigue will impact your ability to drive safely |
| • | Exercise your eyes by shifting the focus of your eyes to different parts of the road |
| • | Use stimulating beverages such as coffee or tea |
| • | Relax and stay calm |
Servicing
If you have any questions concerning the proper use or maintenance
of
your vehicle, please call your Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
A list of dealers can be found in the Dealer Directory Supplement or on the Internet.
Alternatively, you can contact us on 1800-209-6006 /
customercare@mahindra.com
Running-in
Driving smoothly during first 1,000 kilometers. will help to
prevent
abnormal and premature system wear. Proper running-in
will improve the life of drivetrain and vehicle components.
A new engine may consume more oil during the first 1,000
kilometers. of
running. This should be considered as a normal part
of break-in and not interpreted as any problem with the engine.
Mahindra Genuine Parts
Mahindra uses high quality parts for building the vehicles. In the
event
that any parts need replacement, we recommend that
you use only Mahindra genuine parts.
Non-Mahindra parts may harm vehicle performance and will not be
covered
by your Mahindra warranty.
The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non genuine
parts
Any unauthorized
modifications or
alterations to this vehicle or failure to use appropriate specification and quality spare
parts could seriously affect vehicle road worthiness and safety leading to an accident,
resulting
in serious injury
Mahindra Genuine
Accessories
A wide selection of quality accessories are available through your
Mahindra Authorised Dealer. These accessories have been
specifically engineered to allow you to personalize your vehicle to suit your requirements and
complement
its style and aerodynamic
appearance.
Each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets
Mahindra's
rigid engineering and safety specifications. Every
Mahindra accessory installed according to the Mahindra installation provisions comes with the
respective
accessory warranty.
Consult your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for detailed information
about
accessories available for your specific model variant.
For maximum vehicle
performance
and safety considerations, always keep the following information in mind:
| • | The company shall not be liable / responsible for any damages / injuries, including consequential damages / injuries, resulting due to fitment of unauthorised aftermarket accessories and / or tapping / cutting wires in the wiring harness When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front and rear axle. Consult Mahindra Authorised Dealer for specific weight information |
| • | Bull bars and nudge guards are not recommended |
| • | Accessories causing any change in vehicle specifications like wheel rims, bull bars, etc., may affect the performance of safety systems |
| • | Mobile communication systems such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters and installed in your vehicle should comply with the local regulations and should be installed only by your Mahindra Authorised Dealer and can potentially affect the vehicle performance. |
Vehicle Safety
When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:
| • | Always turn OFF the ignition when you park the vehicle |
| • | Do not leave any valuables in your vehicle. If you must leave something in your vehicle, hide them and securely lock all the doors |
| • | Close all the windows completely and lock all the doors |
| • | Please lock and take the key fob with you |
When Sleeping in Your
Vehicle
| 1. | Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In particular, if you stay or sleep in the vehicle and the air conditioner or heater turned on, you can suffocate to death |
| 2. | While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear shift lever or accelerator and thereby cause an accident |
Hazardous Materials: Do
not
store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the console box or other spaces. In hot
weather, they
can explode
and cause a fire.
Fire Extinguisher: For
safety,
we strongly recommend that you have fire extinguisher in your vehicle. Keep it ready for use at any
time.
Be familiar
with how to use it
When Passing the Intersection
or
Railway Crossing
When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the vehicle
to
check the safety and drive through carefully. If the
vehicle is turned off in the middle of the intersection or railway crossing, get someone to help
you and
move the vehicle
to a safe place quickly.
Do not Switch off the Engine
While
Driving
Do not switch off the engine while driving. Otherwise, it makes the
steering wheel heavier, influence the brake performance
and consequently dangerous
System Safety Mode : The
protective measures including illumination of engine warning lamp and reduced engine power are
taken
(engine turned off
in extreme case) when there is a critical fault in the system or a malfunction in the major
electrical or
fuel system. This
indicates the system entering the safety mode to protect the vehicle’s drive system.
| • | If the safety mode is activated, pull over and stop the vehicle to a safe location immediately and contact your Mahindra dealer. Then drive slowly or have the vehicle towed to a Mahindra Authorised Dealer according to the dealer’s instruction and have your vehicle checked by a Technician |
| • | If you continue to drive in this state, normal driving is not maintained due to the fixed engine rpm and engine can stop. But even more importantly, continued driving with this state may damage the drive system |
Do Not Modify This
Vehicle: If
unauthorised modifications are made on the vehicle, the company is not liable for repairing the
modified
parts even during
the term of warranty. Other part problems caused by modification are also not covered.
| • | The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number of precision parts that have passed through countless experiments and tests. |
| • | These parts are deeply and systematically interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or altered without authorization, may under perform or cause critical damage to the vehicle and human life |
Protecting Our
Environment: As
a responsible citizens, all of us have an important role to play in protecting our environment.
Judicious
vehicle usage
and ensuring hazardous waste disposal (including cleaning and lubrication fluids) are important
steps
towards this initiative.
Body Repairs: If your
vehicle
is in a collision, contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer to ensure that it is repaired with Mahindra
Genuine
Parts. Mahindra has collision repair centers that meet strict requirements for training, equipment,
quality, and customer
satisfaction. Some repair shops and insurance companies might suggest using non-original equipment
to
save money. However,
these parts do not meet Mahindra’s high standards for quality, fit and corrosion resistance. In
addition,
non-genuine parts
or equipment might lead to damages or failures of the vehicle’s systems.
End of Life Disposal
Composition: Vehicle is made from steel, Aluminum, Lead, Copper,
Wood,
other plastics & miscellaneous parts. These materials are reusable
by recycling them through a proper procedure. Some are hazardous to environment and living beings
to be
disposed as per local
pollution board regulations.
Disposal: As batteries are made of lead, lithium & other
chemical
composites with solvents as electrolyte which are harmful, make impact
on environment are to be disposed as per local pollution board regulations. Certain components of
this
vehicle such as seat
belt pre-tensioner, airbag and battery may contain hazardous material. Special handling may be
required
for service or vehicle
end-of-life disposal.
Similarly ABS & other plastic panels, materials used are to be
disposed to accredited agencies for recycling.
Most of other materials are reusable, hence components are to be
segregated as per their composition as hazardous and non-hazardous,
disposed to accredited recycling agencies. Hence it is advised to contact Mahindra Authorised
Dealer for
further information
1.5 Audio/Infotainment Manual
Please refer the user e-manual in infotainment for details
regarding:
| • | Audio/Video functions (if equipped) |
| • | Bluetooth functions |
| • | Hands-free usage |
| • | Android Auto (if equipped) |
| • | Car Play (if equipped) |
1.6 Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN)
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is the legal identity of your
vehicle. The vehicle identification number is stamped on
the VIN plate riveted on the floor under the driver seat of the vehicle. Flip the cutout provided
in the
carpet to view the
VIN plate.
|
|
1.7 Engine Number
|
Petrol
|
Diesel
|
|
|
Engine Number is punched on the engine crank case adjacent to
transaxle
on the front side. The engine number is also stamped
on the VIN plate.
1.8 Front Overview
|
A
|
Side repeater*
|
|
B
|
Outside Rearview Mirror (ORVM)
|
|
C
|
Front Windshield
|
|
D
|
Front Wiper
|
|
E
|
Hood
|
|
F
|
Headlamp (Low beam)
|
|
G
|
Turn Signal Lamp
|
|
H
|
Fog Lamp*
|
|
I
|
Head Lamp High Beam
|
|
* if
equipped
|
|
1.9 Rear Overview
|
A
|
Rear Turn Indicator
|
|
B
|
Rear Windshield / Demister*
|
|
C
|
Roof Antenna*
|
|
D
|
High Mounted Stop Lamp
|
|
E
|
Rear Wiper*
|
|
F
|
Rear Parking Lamps
|
|
G
|
Reverse Lamp
|
|
H
|
Brake/Park Lamp
|
|
I
|
Reverse Parking Assistance Sensors (RPAS)
|
|
J
|
Rear Camera*
|
|
* if
equipped
|
|
1.10 Instrument Panel Overview
|
A
|
Centre Storage
|
M
|
Accelerator/Brake/Clutch Pedal*
|
|
B
|
Side Vents
|
N
|
Front Storage
|
|
C
|
Side Defrost Vents
|
O
|
Parking Brake
|
|
D
|
Front Co-passenger Airbag
|
P
|
Console Storage
|
|
E
|
Infotainment Screen*
|
Q
|
Cup Holder
|
|
F
|
Centre Vents
|
R
|
Power Outlet
|
|
G
|
Wiper Control Stalk
|
S
|
TGS Lever*/Gear Lever*
|
|
H
|
Steering Wheel
|
T
|
AUX/USB Ports*
|
|
I
|
Steering Controls*
|
U
|
HVAC Control
|
|
J
|
Instrument Cluster
|
V
|
Glove Box
|
|
K
|
Horn Pad/Driver Airbag
|
W
|
Hazard Switch
|
|
L
|
Head Lamp Levelling Switch
|
* if
applicable
|
|
1.11 Connected Car (If equipped)
Kindly refer the BLUE SENSE
PLUS mobile app for connected car related features.
1.11.1 Login &
Registration
Helps you to create account and also existing user to login into
the
account for accessing the account.
Follow the below steps for Login and Registration:
| • | You can select sign up option from login page which redirects to sign up page |
| • | Then enter registered Mobile number given in KYC form for connected services and click on Generate OTP |
| • | OTP with a validity will be send to the same mobile number |
| • | If OTP is not received, you can request the OTP again by clicking on "Resend OTP" |
| • | After entering valid OTP, click on “Verify My account” |
| • | On successful verification you will be notified with a message " Account Verified" |
| • | You will be directed to "Terms and Condition" with "I Agree" option on successful authentication |
1.11.2 Forgot & Change
Password And
Forgot & Change Pin
This Feature allows the existing user to change Password and
change
PIN.
In case user forgets the Password and PIN below flow helps to create PIN and password.
In case user forgets the Password and PIN below flow helps to create PIN and password.
1.11.3 Change your password
To Change your
password on
app if you are already logged in:
| • | Tap on the top Left corner from home screen |
| • | Click on My Account and select Change Password |
| • | Page will open with Old password, New password and Confirm Password fields |
| • | Fill all the required field and tap save button+ |
1.11.4 Forgot your password
In case you forget your password:
| • | Tap on the Forgot Password? link from login page |
| • | In forgot password page, enter the registered mobile number for connected services and click on Generate OTP |
| • | Enter the OTP and click on Next button |
| • | Enter New Password and Confirm Password and tap on Save button |
1.11.5 Change your PIN
Incase you want the change the PIN
| • | Tap on the top left corner from home screen |
| • | Click on My Account and select change PIN |
| • | Page will open with Enter Password, New PIN and Confirm PIN field |
| • | Fill all the required field and tap Save button |
1.11.6 Forgot your PIN
In case you forget your PIN :
| • | Tap on the Forgot PIN? Link from login page |
| • | In forgot PIN page with open Enter Password, New PIN and Confirm PIN field |
| • | Enter Password, New PIN and Confirm PIN and tap on Save button |
1.11.7 Features
|
FEATURE
|
DESCRIPTION
|
|---|---|
|
Check AC Status
|
Feature helps you to remotely check the
AC
status via mobile application
|
|
Check Door Alert Status
|
Allows the customer to remotely check
the
status of the vehicle
|
|
Check Distance To Empty
|
Reads Fuel information through mobile
app.
Helps to check the fuel information and
range
i.e. the distance can be covered with the available fuel in mobile
application
|
|
Create Enquiry
|
Any Query / Enquiry about the product,
Get
info on Mahindra. Send an Inquiry on any car model. Dealers will get
back to
the
customer on details
|
|
Check ODO
|
Allows the customer to remotely check
the
odometer of the vehicle
|
|
Check Tyre Pressure
|
Read Tyre Pressure through mobile
Devices
|
|
Device Unplug
|
When device is unplugged from vehicle an
alert
notification will be sent to your mobile application
|
|
Document Wallet
|
Storage and retrieval of documents such
as
Driving license, Insurance, PUC etc
|
|
Door Open Alert
|
Notify when any of the vehicle door
opens in
movement and also when you trigger for door lock and the door remains
open
unintentionally
|
|
Emergency Assist
|
In event of crash, call will be
triggered
automatically from mobile phone to emergency services i.e. 108 and SMS
will be
sent
along with location details to the emergency number configured,
Tapping on the SOS button in Mobile app
will
send SMS notification to emergency contacts.
|
|
Engine Idle Alert
|
Alerts when unwanted engine idling is
detected
for a set period of time. Time can be configured in mobile application.
|
|
Find My Car
|
Helps to identify the location and
directs you
to your car park location.
|
|
Fuel Diary
|
Maintain systematic logs of fuel
inclusive of
time stamp, quantity of fuel, name o f the gas station, price of the
fuel etc.
Helps you to take control of your wallet
on
every fuel drop you spend !
|
|
Geo Fence
|
Alerts when your vehicle moves out of a
set
boundary area
Helps you to create virtual boundary for
any
region and will be notified whenever your vehicle moves in or out of
that
boundary.
|
|
High Engine temperature alert
|
Alerts when Engine temperature raise
beyond
the predefined limit.
|
|
In car Audio Control
|
This feature allows user to control the
audio
on car from mobile app
|
|
In car Climate Control
|
This feature allows the user to control
the
climate on car from mobile
|
|
Insurance Expiry alert
|
Suggests in prior to renew the Insurance
as
expiry date of Insurance approaches.
Notify you in prior when the insurance
is
about to expire.
|
|
Lamp Status Alert
|
Alerts when vehicle park lamp was left
in ON condition
Notify when the vehicle park lamp is left in ON condition and helps
to turn
OFF remotely via mobile application.
|
|
Live Tracking
|
GPS based vehicle tracking system for
tracking
vehicle location anywhere and at anytime
Helps to provide the real time vehicle
location when vehicle is in movement.
Helps in sharing the vehicle location
for a
set time to your family and friends
|
|
Low Fuel Assist
|
Identifies low fuel level and notify in
your
mobile application. Helps in assisting you to nearby fuel station
|
|
My Car Information
|
Essential information about the vehicle
like
VIN, Variant and so on.
|
|
Over Speed Alert
|
Alert when your car exceed the set speed
limit. This speed limit value can be set under alert configuration in
mobile
application.
|
|
Personalized Recommendation
|
Recommendations accordingly to the
persona of
user
|
|
Pit Stop
|
Provides information and navigational
access
to nearby restaurant, ATM, Mahindra Dealership and so on.
|
|
PUC Expiry
|
Notify you in prior when the PUC is
about to
expire
|
|
Remote ON/ OFF — Hazard Lamp
|
Remotely control hazard lamp via mobile
phone
|
|
Remote vehicle door lock & unlock
|
Provide access to the vehicle by
remotely
locking and unlocking the doors when vehicle is stationary
|
|
Save Route/ Save Place
|
Provision to save a route /place
|
|
Seat belt Status Alert
|
Notify you whenever the driver is not
wearing
the seat belt during vehicle movement in mobile application
|
|
Share My Location
|
Share your car's location with friends
and
family
|
|
Stolen Vehicle Tracking
|
Alert during any unauthorized access to
vehicle detected
|
|
Telematics Control Unit Unplug Alert
|
If Telematics Control Unit removed, it
generates the alert and intimate to customer.
|
|
Time Fence
|
Notify you when any movement of vehicle
is
detected during set time period
|
|
Turn by Turn Navigation
|
Voice guided Turn by Turn navigation through vehicle speakers
paired
through head unit BT
|
|
Trip Summary
|
This Feature allow the user to view the
trip
summary for allowed time period with parameter like Start time, End
time, Trip
distance, Trip Duration, start location etc
|
|
Tyre Pressure Alert
|
Alerts on excessive/very low and high
tyre
pressure and navigate to nearby fuel station
|
|
Vehicle Start/ Stop Alert
|
Notify you during when normal vehicle
start/stop event detected.
|
|
Weather Information
|
Provides weather information of location
where
the vehicle is located.
|
2 SEATS AND SAFETY
2.1 Seats
Sitting in Correct
Position
Follow the tips below for a comfortable and safe journey:
| • | Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine pressed against the seat back |
| • | The driver and front passenger seat head restraint has 6 positions. Adjust it as close as possible to the above specified position, with the top of the head restraint even with the top of your head |
| • | Maintain sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Maintain at least a Ten inch (10") distance from the centre of the steering wheel to your chest |
| • | The top curve of the steering wheel should align with your chin for ideal road visibility |
| • | Adjust your seat and seat back angle such that your wrists rest on the steering wheel |
| • | Ensure your legs are in bent position while fully depressing the clutch pedal |
The seat should be adjusted
while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals (able to fully depress the clutch pedal),
steering
wheel (rest the wrists on the steering wheel) and your view of the instrument panel
controls.
Never adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is in
motion.
The seat movement may be more than expectation and cause the
driver to unintentionally operate the accelerator or brake, or turn the steering
wheel,
causing loss of control of the vehicle,
an accident or serious personal injury. Adjust the driver's seat only when the
vehicle is
stationary.
Never put objects under the seats. They may interfere with
the
seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly activate the seat position
adjusting lever, causing the seat to suddenly move, resulting in loss of control of
the
vehicle, an accident or serious personal
injury.
While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the
seat or
near the moving parts. This may lead to injuries.
2.1.1 Front Seat
Front Seat Slide
To move the seat forward or backward, pull and hold the seat
slide
lever up and move the seat to the desired position. Then,
release the lever to lock.
While adjusting the seat,
make
sure the latch engages fully on both side of the fore-aft adjustment track rails and the
seat
is locked firmly in the desired position. An unlocked seat may move in a sudden stop or
collision, causing injury to the person
in that seat. Push and pull on the seat to ensure that it is locked.
Front Seat Recline
|
To change the seat back angle, lean forward
slightly
and raise the lever. Then, lean back to the desired angle and release
the lever. After adjusting, make sure the lever is returned to its original
position
and the seat back is locked.
|
The seat belts
provide
maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision when the occupants are sitting up
straight and well
back in the seats.
If you are
reclined,
the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the
abdomen,
or the shoulder
strap may contact your neck.
The more the seat
is
reclined, the greater the risk of serious injury.
When returning the
rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back
while
operating the
lever.
Front Seat Height Adjustment
(If
equipped)
|
The driver seat height can be raised or lowered
with
the help of height adjust handle.
|
To lower the seat cushion, push the lever down several times.
To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever up several times.
Do not adjust the height
of
seat while vehicle is in motion.
2.1.2 Passenger Seat Recline
|
To change the seat back angle, lean forward
slightly
and raise the lever. Then, lean back to the desired angle and release
the lever. After adjusting, make sure the lever is returned to its original
position
and the seat back is locked.
|
The seat belts provide
maximum
protection in a frontal or rear collision when the occupants are sitting up straight and
well
back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen,
or the shoulder strap may contact your neck. The more the seat is reclined, the greater
the risk
of serious injury.
When returning the
rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back while
operating the
lever.
2.1.3 Passenger Seat Slide
|
To move the seat forward or backward, pull and
hold the
seat slide lever up and move the seat to the desired position. Then,
release the lever to lock.
|
While adjusting the seat,
make
sure the latch engages fully on both side of the fore-aft adjustment track rails and the
seat
is locked firmly in the desired position. An unlocked seat may move in a sudden stop or
collision, causing injury to the person
in that seat. Push and pull on the seat to ensure that it is locked.
2.1.4 Rear Seat
Second row bench seat is of 60:40 split configuration and also
has a
foldable armrest.
|
|
Folding The Rear Seat
Back
To fold down the rear seat back:
| • | Insert the rear seat belt buckle and belt webbing in the storage to prevent the seat belt from being damaged |
| • | Lower the rear head restraints to the lowest position |
|
|
When the seatback is released from its holding latch, the
seatback
can completely be folded. Ensure that none of your body
parts are trapped.
|
|
| • | Fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle |
| • | To use the rear seat, lift and pull the seatback backward. Pull the seatback firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place |
Rear Seatback Holding
Latch
Before returning the folded seat back to the normal position.
Pull the
rear seat belt out of the seat back so that the seat
belt is not jammed with the holding latch.
|
|
| • | Do not fold or unfold the rear seat when the vehicle is moving |
| • | Make sure that there is nobody on the folded seatback and in cargo area |
| • | If you put sharp or heavy objects on the seatback, there might be some damage to the seatbacks or even to the seats |
| • | Without completely lowering the second row head restraints or with excessively reclined front seat back, there may be some damage to the head restraints or the centre console if the second row seats are folded |
| • | Take care that there are no objects placed on the rear seat cushion before folding the rear seat back down as any sharp features in the object may damage the seat cover |
| • | All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made before any driving |
| • | Make sure that your seat is completely locked after adjusting |
| • | Any object that might damage the seat should not be placed on the seat |
| • | Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision. Make sure that the head restraints are in place and adjusted before driving |
| • | Do not recline the seat back more than needed for comfort while vehicle is in motion. The seat belt is the most effective when the passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the seat back is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding under the lap belt and getting injured are increased |
| • | Do not leave children unattended in parked vehicles. This can cause unexpected accident |
| • | You can be hurt by the edges of the mechanism of the seat when trying to get the small objects (cigarette lighters, coins, credit cards) under the seat or caught between the seat and the centre console. Wear protective gloves to prevent injury |
| • | Never try to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving |
| • | Unexpected movement of the seat or seat back can cause loss of control |
| • | Take care not to bother the passenger behind you when adjusting the seat position |
| • | Sit upright in the centre of the seat and wear the seat belt around your hip and pelvic bones |
| • | Do not place any objects in the path of seat back movement. Any obstruction in this path prevents the seat back from being locked, causing severe injuries or death during a collision |
| • | Always raise the seat back to the proper upright position before driving |
| • | Never drive the vehicle with the seat folded. In a collision, you will be seriously killed or injured as you lose the protection the seat belt can provide |
| • | To avoid unexpected accidents including severe injuries and death, sit in the position so that the distance between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 10 inches, as long as you are comfortable with driving |
| • | Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or between the seats. The gas in the lighter container under the seat is potentially flammable when it is released from the container when the seat is moved |
| • | Additional cushion between you and the seat cushion reduces the frictional force and could make you slide under the seat belt. This could result in serious injury or death |
| • | Do not insert your hands under the seat or in the path of the seat movement when adjusting the seat. Your hands or fingers could get trapped between the seat and the frame |
| • | Do not ride with the seat back reclined too much. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision, which could result in severe injury or death. Also, you cannot be protected by the seat belt and the belt can strangle you or even cut into your stomach. Therefore, sit up straight in your seat by keeping your seat back upright while driving |
| • | When returning the seat back to the upright position, hold the seat back with your one hand and pull the release lever with the other hand. The more the seat back is reclined, the greater the restoring force of the seat back is. If you do not hold the seat back while adjusting the seat back, you could be injured by the restoring force |
2.1.5 Second Row Bench Seat
(If
equipped)
Loading cargo on the
seats is
dangerous. The cargo becomes a projectile that could hit and injure passengers in a sudden
stop
or collision. Cargo should always be kept on the floor.
Seat Fold
|
|
The second row seat back can folded forward for maximum cargo
space.
To fold the second row seat back down, pull the knobs at the top
both
sides of the seat firmly and push seat back forward.
2.2 Head Restraint (if equipped)
The head restraint comprises the padded portion which contacts your
head
and is inserted/locked in receptacles on the top
of the seat back.
Your vehicle seats are equipped with head restraints which are
vertically
adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints
is to help limit head motion in the event of rear collision.
Always align top of the head restraint with the top of your head or
as
close to it as possible. To lower the head restraint,
press the lock knob and push the head restraint down.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up without pressing the
release
button. To lower the head restraint, press the release
button on top of the seat back and push the head restraint down.
Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in
serious
head and neck injuries in case of a collision.
Do not apply excessive force to the head restraint during
adjustment.
It may get damaged.
If possible, place the centre line of the head restraint at the
passenger’s eye level.
If the passenger is too tall or too short, adjust the head
restraints
to highest or lowest position.
2.3 Seat Belt
2.3.1 General Warnings and
Instructions
At least once each
month, inspect the seat belt webbing for any cuts, tears, or other signs of wear
(such as
fraying along
the edges). Also inspect the anchors, retractors, and buckles to be sure they are
tight
and operational.
| • | All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. In an accident, an un-belted passenger becomes a projectile, and can cause serious injury to himself or another passenger. |
| • | In a rollover crash, an un-belted person is significantly more likely prone to Injury than a person wearing a seat belt |
| • | In order to be properly buckled, you must always sit up straight and keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part must be worn low and tight across your hips, just touching the top of your thighs. While fastening the seat belt, the shoulder strap of the seat belt must pass over your chest and top of your shoulder. It must never touch your neck, face, the side of your shoulder, arm, or pass under your arm. The belt must always be flat against your body and not twisted in any way. Nothing, such as an arm rest, a pocketbook, or any external objects should be between you and the seat belt. Improperly worn of a seat belt will reduce the protection in an accident. |
| • | Seat
belts should be adjusted as tightly as possible, consistent with
comfort to
properly secure the wearer in the seat.
|
| • | The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for adults must be properly used and maintained. |
| • | For usage of adult seat belt to secure children, refer to section of manual for child seat positions and use a child restraint systems |
| • | Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is in motion. Passenger who does not wear the seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the vehicle inside hard parts, against other occupants or out of the vehicle during emergency stop or collision. |
| • | Do not use any accessories on seat belts or modify in any way the seat belt system. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash |
| • | An accident or emergency stop, can damage your seat belt system, even if the accident is “minor”. Please have your Mahindra Authorised Dealer inspect the seat belt system after an accident |
| • | Please be aware that any unsecured item in your vehicle, such as your pet, unsecured child restraint system, a laptop or mobile phones, can become a projectile in the event of an accident or sudden stop, causing injuries to occupants in the vehicle |
Never use a
damaged
seat belt system. A damaged seat belt will not provide protection in an accident,
resulting in serious
injury.
| • | Seat belt systems are prone to abuse. They are not indestructible. They must be handled with care to avoid damage |
| • | Keep the belts clean and dry. Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and webbings are soiled. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners. These chemicals will severely weaken the belts |
| • | Retractors in 3-point type seat belts retract the seat belts when not in use. The inertia lock and coil spring allow the belts to remain comfortable on users during normal driving. During accidents or abrupt stops, inertia locks restrict the sudden forward movement of the wearer |
Seat Belts -
Patients:
Persons with serious medical conditions should
also wear
a seat belt. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations before
travel.
Seat Belts - Pregnant
Women: Pregnant women must also wear
seat
belts. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations.
 |
The
lap
belt should be worn snugly and as low as possible over the hips. The
shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder,
but never across the stomach area. When worn properly, the seat belt
will
protect both the mother and the foetus in an accident
or emergency stop.
|
A pregnant
woman
should never wear the seat belt across the stomach area. This could lead to
serious
injuries to the foetus
and/or the pregnant mother.
Never wear
twisted
seat belts. Excessive forces will be transferred from the belt to the wearer, in
a
collision, resulting
in serious personal injury.
Each seat belt
is
meant for use by one person only. Using one seat belt for more than one person at
a
time is dangerous. The
seat belt will not be able to absorb the impact forces properly leading to
serious
injuries.
Never wear a
belt
around a child being carried on the occupant's lap. This could lead to serious
injuries.
Seat Belt Usage is
Necessary
to:
| • | Reduce the possibility of being out from your vehicle during an accident. |
| • | Reduce the possibility of injuries to upper body, lower body and legs during an accident |
| • | Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle |
Children who are
too
large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the
vehicle
seat belts.
The lap portion should be snug fastened on the hips and as low as possible and the
shoulder belt should be rout across the
child's shoulder, not across neck or face. If you are unable to position the belt
across
the child's shoulder, the child should
be seated in a booster seat. Frequently check the seat belt to be sure it remains
snug and
in position. A squirming child
could cause the seat belt to come out of position.
2.3.2 Seat Belt Configuration
|
To protect you and your passengers in the event
of an
accident, it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used
by all occupants inside of your vehicle.
|
Seat Belt Types with respect
to
Location
|
Seat
Location
|
Seat
Belt
Type
|
|
Driver Seat
|
Seat
belt
with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter
(RPLL)
|
|
Co-Driver Seat
|
Seat
belt
with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter
(RPLL)
|
|
2nd Row LH (40P)
|
Seat
belt
with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)
|
|
2nd Row RH (60P)
|
Seat
belt
with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR) & Lap Seat
belt
|
Emergency Locking Retractor
(ELR): The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) allows the driver seat belt to freely
extend
and retract with occupant movement, yet
locks the belt during a sudden stop or upon impact.
Retractor Pretensioner &
load
limiter (RPLL): A pretensioner is designed to retract some of the webbing of a seat
belt the
instant a collision occurs, tightening the seat
belt to restrain occupants quickly and reducing the amount they are thrown forward in a moderate
or
severe frontal crash.
Load limiters help protect occupants from seat belt-inflicted
injury.
In the event of a crash, the pretensioner restrains
the occupant until certain amount of force is applied. At this point the load limiter releases
the
webbing gradually so as
not to exert too much force on the chest of the occupant.
2.3.3 Seat Belt Pretensioner
In the event of a crash being detected, the belt pretensioner
locks
the seat belt by drawing back the seat belts on the driver’s
and passenger’s torso and pelvis to prevent the driver and passenger being thrown forward. The
seat
belt pretensioner combined
with the seat belt and airbag further increases safety.
Its activation through Airbag ECU is signalled by pulling down
of the
metallic cable and removes slack in in seat belt.
To obtain the highest
degree of
protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt on shoulder
keeping
it firmly close to the chest and bottom part of the seat belt on pelvis.
In case of side impact collisions, front air bags are not
inflated,
but seat belt pretensioners located in the same position
with impact direction will be deployed together with side air bag
Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed again. Have
the
deployed seat belt pretensioners replaced by an Authorised
dealer.
|
Operation of
pretensioner
|
|
|
When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt
pretensioners pull back the seat belts immediately to restrain the occupants
to their seats.
|
|
Operation of
load
limiter
|
After frontal collision, the load limiter
releases the
seat belt to prevent the occupant from being injured due to belt force.
|
Fastening the seat
belt
Even if seat belts are not worn, the air bag will deploy in case
of
impact, collision triggered. In addition, airbags can
protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their seat belts. Airbags may cause injuries to
occupants if they do not
wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.
| • | Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not, the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden manoeuvring of the vehicle |
| • | Sometimes you may have to apply strong force to pull the webbing out of the retract |
| • | Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time |
| • | Seat belts and airbag’s can significantly minimise possible injury to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from fatal collisions or injury |
| • | Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts should be checked and repaired by only a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service centre |
| • | An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant or child restraint |
2.3.4 Fastening the Seat Belt
(3-Point type)
|
|
Adjust the seat as needed, sit up straight and well back in the
seat.
To fasten your seat belt, pull the webbing out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. An audible “click” would be heard when the
tab
locks into the buckle.
Pull up on the shoulder strap to tighten the lap belt across your hips. The seat belt retractor
will
pull in any slack in
the shoulder strap. A slow and easy motion will allow the belt to extend and let you move your
body
around freely.
Periodically check the seat belt as you ride to be sure it
remains
snug and in position. If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will also lock (restrict) if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
If the driver or
co-driver seat
belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched ON, the seat belt warning lamp
illuminates
and chimes beat will turn till seat belt fastened. Refer “Warning Lamps” in the
“Instrument
Cluster Features” chapter for
further details.
2.3.5 Fastening the Seat Belt
(2-Point Lap type)
|
|
This seat belt is applicable to the second row middle passenger
seat.
Insert the tongue into the buckle until it snaps. Position
the lap belt on the hips as low as possible.
2.3.6 Seat Belt Release (both
3-Point & 2 Point)
|
|
|
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow
the
belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly,
pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
Never insert coins,
clips, etc.
in the buckle as this may prevent from properly latching the tongue and may cause damage
to
the buckle mechanism, thereby making the seat belt ineffective in an accident, resulting
in
serious personal injury.
2.3.7 Driver Seat Belt
Reminder
Indication
The driver seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will blink in
instrument cluster if driver doesn’t wear the seat belt and
will be continuous until belt is buckled. Chime will be activated when vehicle travels more than
500
metres or attains 25
Kms/Hrs of speed while vehicle is in motion which will be ON for 95 seconds
2.3.8 Passenger Occupant
Detection
System (PODS) & Seat Belt Reminder Indication
|
PODS detects the presence of occupant in the
passenger
seat.
|
If Occupant is present on passenger seat and not wearing the
seat
belt, Seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will glow on
the center fascia switch provided in vehicle instrument panel and will be continuous until the
seat
belt is buckled. It should
be noted that the PODS require a minimum weight hence children may not be detected by PODS.
Along with
this warning symbol,
a Chime in Cluster will be ON for 95 seconds. Do keep in mind that after market seat covers also
may
deteriorate the detection
senor performance, don’t use the non recommended/non authorized seat covers.
Seat belt reminder
warning lamp
for passenger seat may glow in case of child is present in passenger seat.
Strong advice not to
carry
children in front seat without child restraint seat. Also do not use adult seat belt which
is
designed
to harness person taller than 140cm Always ensure Passenger Airbag is turn OFF before you
carry
child on passenger seat. We strongly urge that
children should be in middle row using the child seats with the ISO FIX
2.3.9 Seat Belt Height
Adjuster
|
You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt
anchor
for maximum comfort and safety of both front seats. If the height of
the seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective
protection.
|
The shoulder portion of the belt should be adjusted so that it
lies
across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest
to the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the
height adjuster to an appropriate position while pressing
the height adjuster button. Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure
that it has locked into the position.
Adjust the shoulder belt
height
sitting well back in the seat. Do not adjust the seat belt height while vehicle is in
motion.
2.4 Infant and Child Safety
|
|
|
|
|
Mass
group
|
Restraint
device figure
|
Front
Passenger
|
Rear
centre
|
Rear
out
board
|
Mounting
method of vehicle
|
|
O ~ up to 10 kg (0 ~ 9 months)
|
Rear-facing child seat
|
U
|
U
|
U
|
3-point belt rear-facing
|
|
O+ ~ up to 13 kg (0 ~ 2 years)
|
Rear-facing child seat
|
U
|
U
|
U
|
3-point belt rear-facing
|
|
I ~ 9 to 18 kg (9 months ~ 4 years)
|
Forward-facing child seat
|
U
|
U
|
U
|
3-point
|
|
II ~ 15 to 25 kg (4 years ~ 6 years)
|
Booster seat
|
U
|
U
|
U
|
3-point
|
|
III ~ 22 to 36 kg (6 years ~ 12 years)
|
Booster seat
|
U
|
U
|
U
|
3-point
|
|
U:
Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in
the
mass group.
UF:
Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints
approved for
use in the mass group.
L:
Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list.
These
restraints may be of the “semi-universal”
categories.
X:
Seat position not suitable for children in the mass
group.
|
|||||
|
Table of Vehicle
Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability
for
Various ISOFIX Positions
|
|||||
|
Mass
group
|
Size
Class
|
Fixture
|
Vehicle
ISOFIX Positions
|
||
|
Front
Passenger
|
Rear
centre
|
Rear
out
board
|
|||
|
Carrycot
|
F
|
ISO/L1
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
|
G
|
ISO/L2
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
|
|
Group 0 up to 10kg
|
E
|
ISO/R1
|
X
|
X
|
IUF
|
|
Group 0+ up to 13kg
|
E
|
ISO/R1
|
X
|
X
|
IUF
|
|
D
|
ISO/R2
|
X
|
X
|
IUF
|
|
|
C
|
ISO/R3
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
|
|
Group I9 to 18kg
|
D
|
ISO/R2
|
X
|
X
|
IUF
|
|
C
|
ISO/R3
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
|
|
B
|
ISO/F2
|
X
|
X
|
IUF
|
|
|
B1
|
ISO/F2X
|
X
|
X
|
IUF
|
|
|
A
|
ISO/F3
|
X
|
X
|
IUF
|
|
Key of letters be inserted in the above table
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of
universal
category approved for use in this mass group.
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS)
given in
attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the
“specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in
this
mass group and/or this size class.
Anchorage Location
Child restraint anchor fittings are installed at the points as
shown in
the figure.
Unrestrained infants and
small
children could be injured
| • | Never transport them unless they are properly restrained |
| • | Use restrained system which meet safety standard |
| • | Follow directions provided by the manufacturer |
2.4.1 Warning for Child
Restraint
| • | Use only
the
officially approved child restraint
Mahindra is not responsible for the personal
injury and
property damage due to the defect of child restraint
|
| • | Use only the child restraint with proper type and size for your baby |
| • | Use only the child restraint at proper location |
| • | Child
restraint
has 5 categories based on the weight as below:
|
| • | Group 0 & 0+ : Rear-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat |
| • | Group I : Forward-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat |
| • | Group II & III : Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened. Always follow the installation and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat |
Cautions for ISOFIX
Seat
| • | The rear seatback anchor is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seatback anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death |
| • | If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation |
| • | Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound |
| • | The child restraint seat strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct seatback anchor |
| • | Make sure that the child restraint system is firmly secured by rocking it in different directions |
| • | Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury |
2.5 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) includes airbags,
pre-tensioners
and ECU. The airbags are designed to provide further
protection to the vehicle occupants in addition to the primary protection provided by the seat
belts and
seat belt pre-tensioners.
The primary components of the system are the sensors which measure
the
crash severity. In the event of a significant frontal
impact, the SRS airbags inflate to work in conjunction with the seat belts and help reduce injuries
mainly to the driver's
and front passenger's head/chest.
Seat belts are the primary
restraint system in the vehicle. An airbag provides supplemental protection in addition to
the
seat belts.
All occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts to minimise the risk of severe injury in the
event
of a crash.
Airbags are more effective
in
reducing injuries when the seat belts are worn.
2.5.1 Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with the following airbags:
| • | Driver’s
Airbag :
|
| • | Passenger’s
Airbag :
|
| • | Side
Curtain
Airbag (if equipped) :
|
| • | Side Seat
Airbag
(if equipped) :
|
An airbag is not designed
to
deploy in every type of crash. Depending on the type of accident or impact, the front
airbags
independently deploy thereby protecting the occupants. It is not necessary that ALL the
airbags
deploy during an accident.
To minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash,
every
passenger must always wear their seat belt (see the chapter
on Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags inflate very quickly with great force. Do not
position any
part of your body too
close to airbag, you or especially children could be seriously injured/killed by a deploying
airbag.
2.5.2 Front Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System
(Airbag)
and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and front
passenger seating positions. The indications of the system's presence are the letters “AIRBAG”
embossed on the airbag pad
cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbag only when an
impact is
sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less
than ± 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
|
Driver
Airbag
|
Front
Passenger
Airbag
|
Front airbag are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear
impact or
rollover crashes. In addition, front airbag will not
deploy in frontal crashes which are below the prescribed deployment threshold where risk of
serious
injuries is low.
Do not place any objects
over
the airbag or between the airbag and yourself.
2.5.3 Seat Side Airbag and
Curtain
Airbag (if equipped)
|
Seat
Side
Airbag
 |
Curtain
Airbag
 |
Your vehicle is equipped with side impact airbag in both the
front
seats. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's
driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection during side impacts or collisions.
The side impact airbag are designed to deploy only during
certain
side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity,
angle, speed and point of impact.
| • | In the case of a side collision, the curtain airbag may be deployed together with the relevant side airbag on the side the collision occurs |
| • | The side impact airbag is supplementary to the seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants |
| • | For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, all seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passengers arms and hands should be placed on their laps |
| • | Do not use any accessory seat covers. Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system |
| • | Do not instal any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag |
| • | Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself |
| • | Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the door and the seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplementary side impact airbag inflates |
2.5.4 Passenger Airbag ON/OFF
Switch
|
A
|
OFF/Deactivated
|
B
|
ON/Activated
|
The front passenger airbag is disabled (not inflatable) when
placing
the passenger airbag ON/OFF switch to “OFF” position.
This switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel, and you can see it when opening
the
front passenger door.
Press and turn this switch to operate
Passenger Airbag OFF
Indicator
This indicator comes on when turning the passenger airbag ON/OFF
switch to “OFF” position to disable the passenger airbag.
2.5.5 Airbag System
Malfunction Lamp
Airbags do not require any regular maintenance of service. The
airbag
system malfunction lamp illuminates when the ignition
is ON, and it turns OFF after about 2 secs. as self check confirming normal operations of airbag
system and malfunction lamp.
This lamp monitors airbag sensor assembly, airbag sensors,
indicator
lamp, seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, inflators,
interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If either of the following conditions occur, there is a
malfunction of
the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioner. Immediately
contact your Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
| • | The lamp does not glow when the ignition is switched ON or glows beyond six (6) secs. after switching the ignition ON |
| • | The lamp comes ON at any other time, even briefly |
| • | The lamp comes ON intermittently |
Never make any
modifications to
your vehicle which could affect the performance of your airbag system. In particular,
changes
to the vehicle frame, bumpers, bull bar, front fenders, ride height, suspension, seat
belts,
interior trim, seats or steering
wheel (especially covers, pads or other trim), could prevent proper deployment of the
airbag. If
you need to make any modifications
to accommodate any disability you may have, please contact your Authorised Mahindra
Dealer.
Never try to open or
strike the
airbag cover. If the airbag cover is cracked or damaged in any way, the airbag may not
function
as intended. Take the vehicle to an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
Even if the airbags do not deploy during an accident, take your
vehicle to an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for a thorough inspection
of the airbag and seat belt systems, no matter how minor the accident. The airbag system could
have
been damaged, and may
not work as intended in the future, resulting in serious injury.
2.5.6 Airbag
Inflation/Deployment
The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration
of the
vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration
beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. This initiates a
chemical reaction which quickly
fills the airbags with non-toxic gas.
Upon deployment, tear seams moulded directly into the pad covers
separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags.
Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the airbags. A fully inflated airbag, in
combination with a properly
worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head
and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts
deflating,
enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to manoeuvre or operate other controls.
Deployment of the airbags happen in a fraction of a second,
producing
a loud noise releasing a ‘white smoke’ and residue along
with a non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle
for some
time, and may cause
some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue with soap
and
water as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation. If you can safely exit the vehicle, you should do so
immediately.
Airbag deployment may cause windshield to break.
| • | Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent them from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in serious injury |
| • | Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment. The airbags inflate only once |
| • | Do not cover the steering wheel, instrument panel with any object (e.g. dash panel covers) which may prevent the airbags from inflating properly |
| • | The airbags inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can also cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant's hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. Sit straight and well back into the seat. Move your seat as far back as practical to allow room for airbag inflation, while still allowing you to properly operate/drive the vehicle |
The front passenger
should
never sit on the edge of the seat, stand near the glove compartment, rest feet or other
parts of
the body on the dashboard when the vehicle is moving.
The driver or front passenger who is too close to the
steering
wheel or dashboard can be seriously injured during airbag deployment.
| • | The driver must sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle |
| • | The front passenger must sit as far back as possible from the dashboard |
| • | Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying airbag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury |
 |
 |
| • | Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, on the seat cushion centre with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor |
| • | All vehicle occupants must be properly restrained using the seat belts |
| • | All infants and children must be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle in a child restraint seat and be properly restrained by seat belts |
| • | Front airbags can injure occupants improperly positioned in the front seats |
| • | Even with airbags, improperly belted and un-belted occupants can be severely injured when the airbag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, airbags and occupant safety contained in this manual |
| • | Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system or side impact airbags |
| • | Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses |
2.5.7 Child Restraint and
Airbag
|
|
|
“Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat
protected by
an active airbag in front of it”
In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the
front
passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger airbag
inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.
This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the
following
position:
| • | On the front passenger’s sun visor |
Extreme Hazard! Do not
use a
rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an active airbag in front of it!
Never hold an infant or
child
on your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured in the event of a crash. All
infants
and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts
in
the rear seat.
2.5.8 Airbag Deployment
Front Airbag
|
Front airbag are designed to inflate in a frontal
collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
|
The images shown in this
section are for illustrative purpose only. They may not look like your model/variant or
vehicle.
2.5.9 Airbag Non-deployment
Impacts below a pre-determined threshold level may not cause the
airbag to deploy in the following cases:
Collision with Utility Poles
or
Trees -
|
Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides
with
objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is
concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the
sensors.
|
Under-ride Situations
-
|
Running under a truck may not provide the
decelerations
necessary for airbag deployment.
|
Airbags will not inflate in this “under-ride” situation where
deceleration forces that are detected by sensors are significantly
low.
Rear-end Collisions -
|
Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in
rear
collisions, where occupants are moved backward away from the airbags by
the force of the impact.
|
In this case, inflated airbags would not be able to provide any
additional benefit.
Frontal Impact -
|
Frontal impact beyond 30º range from head-on to
the
vehicle.
|
Potholes or Stepped Surfaces
-
|
Driving into a big pothole, stepped surface or
hitting
the far side of a hole/incline will not inflate the airbag.
|
Rollover -
|
Airbags will not inflate in rollover accidents
where
airbag deployment would not provide protection to the occupants.
|
Frontal Side Swipe Impact
-
|
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not
provide
the deceleration force necessary for airbag deployment.
|
In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the
occupants
in a direction where the airbags would not be able to
provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any airbags.
2.6 Airbag Service
Airbag Replacement:
Self-servicing or tampering with the airbag system is
dangerous. An airbag could accidentally deploy causing serious injuries,
or will not deploy when there is a need. Always take your vehicle to an Mahindra
Authorised
Dealer for inspection and repairs.
Removing SRS Related Parts:
We do not recommend removing the instrument
panel,
steering wheel, seats or airbag related parts or sensors by any individual
or garages which are not recommended. Airbags could accidentally activate and cause
serious
injuries, or they may not deploy
when there is a need. Visit an Mahindra Authorised Dealer if these parts must be
removed.
Airbag Disposal:
Improper disposal of an airbag or a vehicle with
live
airbags can be extremely dangerous. Approach an Mahindra Authorised
Dealer to do these jobs.
Airbag Repair:
If the front airbag cover or instrument panel
airbag
cover shows signs of damage or having been removed, the vehicle should
be towed to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for repair. Do not attempt to self
repair or
reinstall the cover.
Airbag Maintenance:
For cleaning the airbag covers/areas, use only a
soft
dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents
or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the
system.
3 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FEATURES
|
Diesel
|
|
|
TFT
 |
LCD
 |
|
A
|
Tachometer
|
E
|
Speedometer
|
I
|
Steering Mode Display
|
|
B
|
Tripmeter
|
F
|
Fuel Gauge
|
J
|
TDMS*
|
|
C
|
Telltales
|
G
|
Odometer
|
K
|
Door Alert
|
|
D
|
Gear Shift Indicator
|
H
|
Temperature Gauge
|
* if equipped
|
|
Petrol
|
TFT
|
LCD
|
 |
 |
|
A
|
Tachometer
|
E
|
Speedometer
|
I
|
Steering Mode Display
|
|
B
|
Tripmeter
|
F
|
Fuel Gauge
|
J
|
TDMS*
|
|
C
|
Telltales
|
G
|
Odometer
|
K
|
Door Alert
|
|
D
|
Gear Shift Indicator
|
H
|
Temperature Gauge
|
* if equipped
|
|
3.1 Tachometer
|
Diesel
|
Petrol
|
|
|
The tachometer indicates the real-time engine speed in thousands of RPM
(revolutions
per minute). Each division is 500 RPM.
Operating the engine at very high RPM may lead to excessive engine wear and low fuel economy.
Maintain
steady engine speed
below 2500 RPM and do not accelerate or decelerate abruptly.
Do not
over-accelerate the engine during idling, this can cause severe engine damage and would
be
treated as abuse of the
engine which is not covered by warranty.
3.2 Speedometer
|
The speedometer indicates the real-time road surface speed of the
vehicle in kilometres per hour.
|
The vehicle
speedometer is affected by size of the tyres used. If the size of the tyres are changed
from
those fitted at the
factory, the speedometer might not display the correct road surface speed and distance
travelled.
Over Speed Alert Buzzer
| • | Primary level: Buzzer will trigger single chime in every 2 minutes when the vehicle speed reaches 80 kmph. once primary level chime is triggered, it will continue playing until speed is reduced to 76 kmph or goes beyond 120 kmph. |
| • | Secondary level: Buzzer will trigger periodic chime when the vehicle speed reaches 120 kmph and chime will continue playing until vehicle speed is reduced to 114 kmph. Below this speed primary level chime will be triggered and will continue till 76 kmph. |
3.3 Odometer
The odometer records and displays the total distance travelled in km. Odometer
cannot
be reset.
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
 |
 |
3.4 Trip Meter
Select TRIP A / TRIP B in screen by pressing Trip
switch
in centre console. Long press of set switch will reset trip information, average speed and driving
time.
|
Variants
|
Trip A
|
Trip B
|
||
|
Min
|
Max
|
Min
|
Max
|
|
|
LCD
|
0
|
999.9
|
0
|
9999
|
|
TFT
|
0
|
9999.9
|
0
|
9999.9
|
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
 |
 |
Trip meter has to be reset
whenever
battery is disconnected due to various reasons.
Else
Average
Speed and Driving Time may not match with trip
value.
3.5 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
The engine coolant temperature gauge
functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It indicates the instantaneous engine
coolant temperature. The coolant temperature varies with changes in weather, load on
engine and
driving pattern.
If gauges is showing 7 or more than 7
bars,
it represents that engine is overheating. This will also be notified through blinking
or continuously ON Engine high temperature lamp.
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
 |
 |
Never remove the Degassing tank
cap when
the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could splash on to
skin/eyes
causing severe burns. Wait for the engine to cool down before adding coolant to the
reservoir.
Do not continue driving the
vehicle with
an overheated engine. This will lead to damage of engine components and engine
seizure.
3.6 Fuel Level Gauge
|
The fuel
level
gauge functions only when the ignition is switched ON. It gives
the
status of the fuel level in the fuel tank.
F indicates the tank is full (42 litres), E indicates the tank is
empty.
|
|
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
 |
 |
When the fuel level reaches the
reserve,
the last bar will be displayed and low fuel telltale will be ON (approx 8 litres).
when the fuel tank is completely empty, last bar goes off from display and low fuel
telltale
will be blinking . The amount
of fuel required to fill the tank up may be less than the specified tank capacity, as a
small
amount of reserve fuel always
remains in the tank.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel level may fluctuate or the last bar may flash earlier than usual. Always check the fuel level when the vehicle is on level road. If the last bar is still off and telltale is blinking even after filling sufficient fuel, contact your Authorised Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel level may fluctuate or the last bar may flash earlier than usual. Always check the fuel level when the vehicle is on level road. If the last bar is still off and telltale is blinking even after filling sufficient fuel, contact your Authorised Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible.
When all the
bars in
the display starts blinking/flashing, contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer at
the
earliest.
3.9 Clock Screens (if equipped)
In LCD, Select Clock in the screen by pressing Trip
switch on the centre console.
Steps to set time
| 1. | Long press set switch to entering time setting. First digit will be blinking. |
| 2. | Short pressing “SET” will change the value one at the time. Long press will change the value to zero. |
| 3. | Use trip switch to move to next digit. |
For high end, Clock is in sync with infotainment. Any change in infotainment
will
reflect on cluster.
3.10 Outside Ambient Temperature (if equipped)
This Screen shows the outside ambient temperature.
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
 |
 |
Changing the Units (TFT)
Once you reach to OAT screen, Long Press the SET switch to change the units. You
can
choose between degree Celsius and degree
Fahrenheit.
Changing the Units (LCD)
| 1. | Once you reach time and OAT screen, long press set switch to enter into setting mode. In setting mode, temperature will be blinking. |
| 2. | Press set switch to change units. |
3.11 Drive Information (if equipped)
In Drive Information, Drive Time and Average Speed will get displayed in screen.
Select Drive Information in screen by pressing Trip
switch on the centre console.
3.12 Gear Recommendation
Gear information shows the actual gear in which user has to drive the vehicle.
Based on the various parameters, it will also suggest to change the gear for
better
fuel economy with up/down recommendation.
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|---|---|
 |
 |
Operating Condition
UP/DOWN arrow along with numeral recommends shifting to that gear.
3.13 Fuel Computer
In Fuel computer, Average Fuel Economy (AFE), Distance to Empty (DTE) and
Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE) will get displayed
in screen.
Select Fuel computer in screen by pressing Trip
switch
on the centre console.
3.13.1 Average Fuel Efficiency (AFE)
Once Fuel computer is selected, Average Fuel Efficiency is displayed on the
Screen.
AFE is calculated based on the Last AFE reset cycle.
3.14 Digital Speedo Meter (if equipped)
 |
Digital speedometer displays the speed of the vehicle
numerically. It provides immersive experience by having option to switch
off the lights of Speedometer and Tachometer.
|
Turning the lights off :
Once you reach to Digital Speedometer screen, Long Press the SET switch to turn
the
lights OFF. Long press the SET switch
to turn ON the lights again.
3.15 Cluster Setting (if equipped)
 |
 |
This allows you to change the settings related to cluster. This screen also
comes with
a timeout. You have to stop vehicle
for changing the settings.
Some setting might not be available as per configuration of the vehicle
Inside Setting Menu : Long pressing the SET switch
will
take you inside the settings option. Here you can change illumination, mood ring colour
for day and night conditions, also you can enable or disable the welcome chime. Use trip switch to
browse
through options
and set switch to enter sub menus.
Colour Setting
| • | Scroll through the screens using TRIP switch till you find settings |
| • | Long press SET switch to enter settings |
| • | Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Select colour setting using set switch |
 |
In colour setting, you can choose from White, Red,
Yellow, Sky
blue and Blue colour for both day and night conditions.
|
Illumination Control
Illumination control feature allows you to change the brightness of the
Instrument
cluster according to light and weather
conditions. It automatically detects the day and night conditions according to park lamp input.
Also you
can customise the
illumination setting so that it doesn’t hurt your eyes.
It provides 6 level illumination control each for day and night conditions.
It provides 6 level illumination control each for day and night conditions.
 |
The default brightness after the B+ power is supplied is
level
5.
|
How to Change Illumination Setting (LCD)
| 1. | Once you reach the illumination setting screen, long press SET switch to enter into setting mode. |
| 2. | Use SET switch to change brightness. |
How to Change Illumination Setting (TFT)
| 1. | Scroll through the screens using TRIP switch till you find settings. |
| 2. | Long press SET switch to enter settings. |
| 3. | Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Select “Brightness” option using SET Switch. |
 |
4. Adjust the Brightness level using SET Switch.
|
Over speed Flash (if equipped)
 |
When the vehicle speed is higher than the speed
configured,
the mood ring flashes. Flashing of the mood ring can be turned
OFF/ON using this setting.
|
| 1. | Scroll through the screens using TRIP switch till you find settings. |
| 2. | Long press SET switch to enter settings. |
| 3. | Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Select “Over speed Flash” option using SET Switch. |
| 4. | Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Select desired option using SET Switch. |
Over speed flash (if equipped) – Be safe than waiting for the warning to
come,
someone’s wait might get longer
Welcome Chime
 |
Welcome chime can be enabled/disabled using this
setting. If
the box is checked means welcome chime is enabled else disabled.
|
| 1. | Scroll through the screens using TRIP switch till you find settings. |
| 2. | Long press SET switch to enter settings. |
| 3. | Use TRIP switch to browse across the options. Turn ON/OFF “Welcome Chime” option using SET Switch. |
3.16 Mood Lighting (if equipped)
|
|
Mood lighting is especially designed to enhance your
driving
experience. I
|
t allows to customise the colour of the inner ring as per your mood.(refer
section
colour setting for changing colour of mood
ring)
This ring will also notify you when you are over-speeding (if equipped). Colour
of the
ring will change to red.
3.17 Vehicle Condition Related Warning (TFT
only)
Following are the warning information available:
|
Display
|
Operating Conditions
|
|---|---|
 |
This message is displayed when the engine check warning
lamp
is turned ON and engine has been running.
|
 |
When the engine oil pressure warning light is ON and
engine
has been running.
|
 |
This message comes on when the ESC system is faulty, and
engine has been running.
|
 |
This message comes when cruise mode is turned ON
manually
using switch.
|
 |
This message comes when cruise mode is turned OFF
manually
using switch.
|
 |
This message comes when brake fluid level is low and
engine
has been running.
|
 |
This message comes when vehicle has crossed scheduled
service
limit.
|
 |
This message comes on when the tail lamps are ON with
the
ignition in the "OFF" state.
|
 |
This message comes when passenger airbag switch has been
turned OFF.
|
 |
This message comes when fuel level warning lamp is ON or
Blinking and engine has been running.
|
 |
This message comes when either of driver or passenger
(if
occupied) seatbelt is unbuckled.
|
 |
This message comes when engine temperature high telltale
is ON
and engine has been running. Indicates that engine temperature
is high.
|
 |
This message comes when water is detected in fuel filter
and
engine has been running. It is applicable for diesel variants
only. (if equipped)
|
 |
This message comes when you are driving vehicle above
120
kmph.
|
 |
This message comes when you try to move the vehicle when
park
brake is still engaged.
|
 |
This message comes when you try to change settings while
driving the vehicle (i.e., vehicle speed is greater than 2kmph).
This message comes with a timeout of 5 secs, after that is goes to TRIP A
screen
through settings screen.
|
 |
The warning screen will be displayed if Automatic Light
functionality is turned ON.
|
 |
The warning screen will be displayed if Automatic Light
functionality is turned OFF.
|
 |
The warning screen will be displayed if Automatic Wiper
functionality is turned ON.
|
 |
The warning screen will be displayed if Automatic Wiper
functionality is turned OFF.
|
3.18 Smart Key Alerts
Refer PKE section of the owner’s manual
|
Display
|
Operating Conditions
|
|---|---|
 |
The warning will be triggered when key is inside the
vehicle
and you try to do Passive lock operation.
|
 |
The warning will be triggered when vehicle is in cranked
or in
ignition ON condition, but key is not inside the vehicle.
|
 |
The warning will be triggered when start/stop switch
stuck for
more than 1 min.
|
 |
The warning will be triggered when user need to keep the
key
in the armrest pocket and then press the start/stop switch to
turn ON the vehicle.
|
 |
The warning will be triggered when Key Fob battery is
Low.
|
 |
The warning will be triggered when any door is open and
user
trying to do passive lock operation.
|
3.19 Steering Lock Alerts (for TFT only)
|
Display
|
Operating Conditions
|
|---|---|
 |
This is a temporary malfunction of ESCL and the message
is
displayed if the vehicle needs to be attempted to start while turning
the steering wheel.
|
 |
This is a temporary malfunction of ESCL and the message
is
displayed if the steering column is not locked
|
 |
The message is displayed if the system check-up is
required
since the ESCL system is malfunctioning.
|
 |
The message is displayed if ESCL coding checkup is
required.
(Corresponding signal transmitted, with no coding between SKM
and ESCL)
|
3.20 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS)
Tyre direction monitoring system or
TDMS
assists you when vehicle has just started and you are about to move the vehicle.
It tells you about the current direction in which tyres are aligned at very beginning of
manoeuvring the vehicle. TDMS works
only when vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged or when vehicle speed is zero
and
vehicle is in neutral and clutch
is not engaged.
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
Operating Conditions
|
||
|---|---|---|---|---|
 |
 |
|||
|
<Level 5>
|
Tyre alignment is displayed in 6 levels (level 0 to
level 5)
depending on the alignment degree when the ignition switch is
turned to "ON" position from "OFF" position
Working conditions:
1. When vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged.
2. When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral
and
clutch is not engaged.
|
|||
 |
 |
 |
 |
|
|
<Level 3>
|
||||
 |
 |
 |
 |
|
|
<Level 0>
|
||||
 |
 |
|||
3.21 Steering Mode Control Alerts
|
Mode
|
Display
|
Operating conditions
|
|
|---|---|---|---|
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
||
|
Comfort
|
 |
 |
Warning indicates that current steering mode is set to
Comfort. This warning is triggered when user press the Steering Mode
Control switch on the center console.
|
|
Normal
|
 |
 |
Warning indicates that current steering mode is set to
Normal.
This warning is triggered when user press the Steering Mode
Control switch on the center console.
|
|
Sport
|
 |
 |
Warning indicates that current steering mode is set to
Sport.
This warning is triggered when user press the Steering Mode
Control switch on the center console.
|
3.22 Welcome and Good Bye Screens
|
Display
|
Operating conditions
|
Remarks
|
 |
Pre-WELCOME sound:
When the driver's door is opened after the theft
deterrent
mode is deactivated
WELCOME sound with logo and
multicolored light in mood ring:
When the open driver's door is closed after the theft
deterrent mode is deactivated.
|
When the ignition is turned on
while
[WELCOME] is displayed.
- WELCOME sound with logo is activated for the time
remaining.
- The screen is changed to System Check screen when the
ignition is turned on.
|
 |
When the ignition is turned off. Goodbye comes with
animation.
|
|
 |
Performs system check once for 3 seconds when the
ignition is
turned on.
|
3.23 Door Open Alerts
|
Display
|
Operating Conditions
|
||
|---|---|---|---|
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
||
 |
 |
||
 |
 |
Passenger door open
High: with animation
Low: No animation
|
|
 |
 |
Driver door open
High: with animation
Low: No animation
|
|
 |
 |
Hood Open
High/Low: Blinking
|
|
 |
 |
Rear door (LH) open
High: with animation
Low: No animation
|
|
 |
 |
Rear door (RH) open
High: with animation
Low: No animation
|
|
 |
 |
Tailgate open
High/Low: Blinking
|
|
3.24 Functional Safety Alert
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|
 |
 |
Instrument cluster shall monitor some of the internal
parameters and if misbehavior found it will enable “Contact Dealer”
alert.
Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately when
“Contact Dealer” alert displayed in cluster.
For LCD Alert will be displayed for 1 mins
For TFT Alert will be displayed for 5 secs
|
3.25 DPF is Clogged (if equipped)
DPF is clogged message will appear when the DPF is clogged. Contact Authorised
Mahindra Dealer immediately for assistance.
|
TFT
|
LCD
|
|
|
3.26 Warning / Tell-tale Lamps in the
Instrument
Cluster-Diesel
|
1
|
Left Turn Indicator
|
17
|
Engine Stop/Start Lamp*
|
|
2
|
Right Turn Indicator
|
18
|
Tiretronics*
|
|
3
|
Cruise Control Indicator*
|
19
|
Seat Belt Warning Lamp
|
|
4
|
Overspeed Alert
|
20
|
DPF Indicator Lamp
|
|
5
|
Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp*
|
21
|
Glow Plug Indicator*
|
|
6
|
Immobiliser
|
22
|
Head Lamp High Beam Lamp
|
|
7
|
ABS Warning Lamp
|
23
|
OBD Check Lamp
|
|
8
|
Parking Brake ON/Brake Fluid Low Warning Lamp/EBD*
|
24
|
EPS Warning Lamp*
|
|
9
|
Parking Lamp
|
25
|
Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
|
|
10
|
Airbag Warning Lamp*
|
26
|
Check Engine Lamp
|
|
11
|
HHC Malfunction*
|
27
|
Battery Charging System Warning Lamp
|
|
12
|
Door Ajar Warning Lamp
|
28
|
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp
|
|
13
|
Low Fuel Warning Lamp
|
29
|
REGEN Indicator Lamp
|
|
14
|
ESC OFF Lamp*
|
30
|
AMT Warning Lamp*
|
|
15
|
ESC Malfunction Warning Lamp*
|
31
|
DEF Indicator Lamp
|
|
16
|
Front Fog Lamp Indicator*
|
*-if equipped
|
|
Petrol
|
1
|
Left Turn Indicator
|
14
|
ESC System Warning Lamp*
|
|
2
|
Right Turn Indicator
|
15
|
Front Fog Lamp Indicator*
|
|
3
|
Cruise Control Indicator*
|
16
|
Engine Stop/Start Lamp*
|
|
4
|
Over Speed Warning Lamp
|
17
|
Tiretronics*
|
|
5
|
Immobiliser
|
18
|
Seat Belt Warning Lamp
|
|
6
|
ABS Warning Lamp
|
19
|
Head Lamp High Beam Lamp
|
|
7
|
Parking Brake ON/Brake Fluid Low Warning Lamp
|
20
|
OBD Check Lamp
|
|
8
|
Parking Lamp
|
21
|
EPS System Warning Lamp*
|
|
9
|
Airbag Warning Lamp*
|
22
|
Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
|
|
10
|
HHC malfunction*
|
23
|
Check Engine Lamp
|
|
11
|
Door Ajar Warning Lamp
|
24
|
Battery Charging System Warning Lamp
|
|
12
|
Low Fuel Warning Lamp
|
25
|
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp
|
|
13
|
ESC OFF Lamp*
|
26
|
AMT Warning Lamp*
|
|
*-if equipped
|
|||
3.27 Warning Lamps
|
Symbol
|
Warning Lamp/Telltale
|
Lamp Pre-check
|
Lamp Status while Engine
running
|
Action/Remarks
|
|---|---|---|---|---|
 |
Left Turn Indicator
|
No
|
Slow or Fast Blinking
|
Indicates
left turn
lamp is blinking
Slow Blinking: Normal operation Fast Blinking: One / more left turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced |
 |
Right Turn Indicator
|
No
|
Slow or Fast Blinking
|
Indicates
right
turn lamp is blinking
Slow Blinking: Normal operation Fast Blinking: One /more right turn lamp bulb has fused. Have the bulb replaced |
 |
Cruise Control Indicator*
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON
|
Indicates
vehicle
is in Cruise mode
|
 |
Overspeed Alert
|
No
|
Blinking
|
Telltale will blink when vehicle is running with speed
more
than 120 kmph
|
 |
Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp*
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON
|
Indicates
water-in-fuel. Drain the water from filter or contact an
Authorised
Mahindra Dealer for assistance
|
 |
Immobiliser
|
No
|
Blinking
|
Slow Blinking: Vehicle is armed with
the
remote
Fast Blinking/Continuously ON: Indicates a system malfunction Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately |
 |
ABS Warning Lamp
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON
|
Indicates
malfunction of the ABS system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra
Dealer
immediately
|
 |
Parking Brake ON/Brake Fluid Low Warning Lamp/EBD*
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON
|
Either one of
the
below conditions:
1. Park Brake might be engaged 2. Brake fluid level might be low 3. There is some concern in EBD. Please contact Mahindra Dealer. |
 |
Parking Lamp
|
No
|
Continuously ON
|
Indicates
Parking
Lamp is ON
|
 |
Airbag Warning Lamp*
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON
|
Indicates
malfunction of the airbag system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra
Dealer
immediately
|
 |
HHC Malfunction*
|
No
|
Continuously ON
|
Indicates
malfunction of Hill Hold Control. Contact an Authorised Mahindra
Dealer
immediately
|
 |
Door Ajar Warning Lamp
|
No
|
Continuously ON
|
Indicates one
or
more doors and/or boot/hood are open
|
 |
Low Fuel Warning Lamp
|
No
|
Continuously ON/Blinking
|
Indicates
fuel
level has reached the reserve level. re-fuel
immediately
|
 |
ESC OFF Lamp*
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON
|
Indicates ESC
OFF
|
 |
ESC Malfunction Warning Lamp*
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON or Blinking
|
Blinking: Indicates ESC has taken
control of
the vehicle stability
Continuously ON: Indicates a malfunction in the ESC system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately |
 |
Front Fog Lamp Indicator*
|
No
|
Continuously Lamp ON
|
Indicates
front fog
lamp is ON
|
 |
Engine Stop/Start Lamp*
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON or Blinking
|
Continuously ON: Engine is
in
auto stop mode
Blinking: Engine Stop/Start is about to stop the engine |
 |
Tiretronics*
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON or Blinking
|
Indicates
low/high
tyre pressure or possible malfunction in Tiretronics. Refer to
Tiretronics section in INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
FEATURES/WHEELS AND TYRES chapter for further
details
|
 |
Seat Belt Warning Lamp
|
No
|
Continuously ON
|
If telltale
is not
turning OFF even after fastening the seat belt, contact an
Authorised
Mahindra Dealer for assistance
|
 |
Glow Plug Indicator*
|
No.
|
Continuously ON
|
Indicates a
malfunction in the starting system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra
Dealer immediately
|
 |
Head Lamp High Beam Lamp
|
No
|
Continuously ON
|
Indicates
Head lamp
high beam is ON
|
 |
OBD Check Lamp
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON or Blinking
|
Telltale will
be ON
till engine starts. After engine starts, if is still ON there is a
potential malfunction related to emission
system, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer
immediately
|
 |
EPS Warning Lamp*
|
After Pre-check Continuously ON till Engine Starts
|
Continuously ON
|
Indicates
malfunction on Electronic Power steering system. Contact an
Authorised
Mahindra Dealer immediately
|
 |
Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
|
No
|
Continuously ON
|
Telltale will
be ON
in ignition ON But engine is OFF. In engine ON condition, it
indicates
engine oil pressure is low. Check
oil level and top-up or contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for
assistance
|
 |
Check Engine Lamp
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON or Blinking
|
Indicates a
potential malfunction in the EMS, contact an Authorised Mahindra
Dealer
immediately
|
 |
Battery Charging System Warning Lamp
|
No
|
Continuously ON
|
Indicates
malfunction in charging system. Contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer
for
assistance
|
 |
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lamp
|
No
|
Continuously ON or Blinking
|
Engine
temperature
very high. Contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer
immediately
|
 |
DPF Indicator Lamp
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON
|
If the DPF
indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DPF
regeneration
has not happened. Follow the instructions
mentioned in the “EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”
|
 |
DEF Indicator Lamp
|
Yes
|
Continuously ON
|
It indicates
that
either DEF Level is low or incorrect DEF has been filled or DEF
Dosing
is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions
mentioned in the ‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”
|
 |
REGEN Indicator Lamp
|
NO | ON/Blink |
ON:
Regeneration is
required
Blink: Regeneration is in progress |
 |
AMT Warning Lamp*
|
YES
|
Continuously ON or Blink
|
Telltale is
used to
indicate an AMT fault. Telltale Continuous ON means AMT Fault.
Contact
Authorized Mahindra Dealer immediately
if the MIL Lamp doesn’t turn off after an ignition reset.
Blinking
Telltale
implies overheating of clutch due to abuse conditions. This is
only to
warn the customer and to prevent
a clutch damage. Telltale will turn off once the clutch
temperature
becomes normal.
|
3.28 Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster
3.28.1 Turn Lamps
The turn lamp arrows in the instrument cluster flash showing the direction
indicated by the turn signals. A sudden increase
in the rate of flashing indicates failure of one or more of the lamp bulbs. Have them replaced
as soon
as possible.
3.28.2 Cruise Indicator (if equipped)
The cruise control lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes
off
in about 3secs. indicating normal status.
The lamp blinks if the accelerator is depressed, while in cruise mode.
When SET+ button in the steering wheel is pressed, cruise control is
activated and
the lamp illuminates indicating the vehicle
is in cruise mode.
When CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel is pressed, the cruise mode is
deactivated and the lamp goes OFF indicating that
the vehicle is not in cruise mode.
If the lamp does not illuminate when the vehicle is in cruise mode or does
not go
OFF when the vehicle is out of cruise mode,
there is a possible malfunction in the lamp or the cruise control system. Have the vehicle
checked by
an Authorised Mahindra
Dealer.
3.28.3 Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp (if
equipped)
The water-in-Fuel warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON
and
goes OFF after about 3 secs. The lamp illuminates
when the accumulation of water in the fuel filter reaches the maximum permissible limit. The
fuel
filter needs to be drained.
Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with the
Water-in-Fuel Warning Lamp ON. This may result in fuel pump / other fuel system
component damage, which will not be covered by the limited warranty.
3.28.4 Immobiliser
Immobiliser Lamp flashes intermittently (few secs. frequency) once the
ignition is
switched OFF and the vehicle security system
is armed (when locked using the RKE).
Fast blinking indicates a malfunction in the engine immobiliser system.
Contact an
Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
3.28.5 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Malfunction
Lamp
The ABS malfunction lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and
goes OFF
after about 3 secs. If the ABS malfunction
lamp continues to remain ON or illuminates while driving (and the brake system warning lamp is
OFF),
ABS will not operate.
But the brake system will still operate conventionally. In this condition, the wheels can lock
during
severe braking. Have
the vehicle checked by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible.
However, if ABS malfunction lamp and brake warning lamp are simultaneously
glowing,
there is a severe malfunction in the ABS.
Operate the vehicle with extreme care and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an
Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
3.28.6 Parking Brake Lamp
The Parking Brake lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes
OFF
after about 3 secs. The lamp illuminates
when Parking brake is engaged or when brake fluid level is low or there is malfunction in EBD.
If the
lamp illuminates while
driving, do the following:
| • | Check if the parking brake is engaged. If yes, disengage it |
| • | Check if brake fluid level is low. If yes, top-up brake fluid to the required level |
Clean the top of the brake fluid reservoir before
removing the cap. Make sure no dirt, impurities or other items fall into
the reservoir. Do not leave the cap off for more than a few minutes. Any contaminants,
impurities or moisture in the brake
fluid can affect brake operation, resulting in an accident.
If the brake warning lamp comes ON while driving,
the
brake system might not be working properly. The pedal might be harder
to operate or might go closer to the floor and it can take longer to stop. Pull off the
road
carefully and stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle towed to the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for checks or
repairs.
Driving the vehicle with the brake warning lamp ON
or
when you suspect brake trouble is very dangerous and could result in
serious injuries. Have your vehicle towed to an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
3.28.7 Park Lamp
The Park lamp indicator illuminates whenever park lamp is switched ON through
Combination switch. During ignition OFF, if
park lamp is ON with driver door open, buzzer alert will be audible.
3.28.8 Airbag Warning Lamp (if equipped)
The airbag warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates when the
ignition is
switched ON and tell tale goes off in 3
secs. irrespective of engine condition. If the lamp remains ON continuously or flash
intermittently,
contact an Authorised
Mahindra Dealer immediately.
Following conditions indicate airbag malfunction:
| • | Lamp fails to go OFF after engine is started |
| • | Lamp does not illuminate at all |
| • | Illuminates while driving |
Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately when the airbag warning
lamp
indicates a system malfunction. The airbag
may not deploy when needed, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly or unnecessarily,
which may result in personal injury.
3.28.9 HHC malfunction (if equipped)
HHC Malfunction Lamp turn ON if there is any malfunction in hill hold control
system of the vehicle.
3.28.10 Door Ajar Warning Lamp
The door ajar warning lamp illuminates when any of the doors including the
hood and
back door are open during ignition ON.
The buzzer chimes when the vehicle speed more than 2 kmph. The lamp and chime goes OFF when all
the
doors are closed properly.
3.28.11 Low Fuel Warning Lamp
When the fuel level in the fuel tank falls below the reserve limit, the low
fuel
warning lamp is illuminated. Refuel sufficiently
and the lamp goes out. If the lamp continues to remain ON even after refuelling, contact an
Authorised
Mahindra Dealer.
3.28.12 ESC OFF Lamp (if equipped)
The ESC OFF lamp lluminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF
after
about 3 secs. The ESC OFF lamp illuminates
when the ESC has been switched OFF manually.
3.28.13 ESC System Warning Lamp (if
equipped)
The ESC system warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and
goes
OFF after about 3 secs. While driving, if
the ESC system warning lamp blinks, it indicates that ESC has taken control of the vehicle
stability.
If the lamp remains
ON, it indicates the malfunction in the ESC System. Contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra
Dealer.
3.28.14 Front Fog Lamp (if equipped)
The front fog lamp telltale indicates the status of the front fog lamp. The
front
fog lamp can be switched ON only when the
parking lamp is ON.
Fog lamp will turn ON, if fitted in the vehicle.
3.28.15 Engine Stop/Start Lamp (if
equipped)
The engine Stop/Start lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and
goes
OFF after about 3 secs. The Engine Stop/Start
lamp flashes when the vehicle/engine is about to stop through the Engine Stop/ Start System. The
lamp
illuminates continuously
when the vehicle/engine has been switched OFF by the Engine Stop/Start System. On restarting the
vehicle / engine again by
using the clutch/key, the lamp goes out.
3.28.16 Tiretronics (if equipped)
The Tiretronics lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes
OFF
after about 3 seconds.
System Malfunction: Tiretronics lamp Blink
for
approx. 90 sec & then Continuous ON.
System Warnings: Tiretronics lamp Continuous
ON.
System malfunction: System fail to
function
normally due to system failure/Sensor failure.
System Warning : indicated Low/High Tire
pressure,
High Temperature, Air Leakage.
3.28.17 Seat Belt Warning Lamp
The seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the buzzer chimes reminding the
driver/co-driver to fasten the seat belt when the
ignition is ON. The lamp will continue to illuminate till the driver/co-driver fastens the seat
belt
properly.
3.28.18 Glow Plug Indicator (if equipped)
Glow plug indicator illuminates when the ignition is turned ON and Glow plug
is
activated. It automatically goes OFF when
the glow plug reaches the required temperature. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer if the
glow plug
lamp does not illuminate
with ignition ON or illuminates while driving.
3.28.19 Head Lamp / High Beam Lamp
The head lamp high beam telltale illuminates whenever the head lamps are
switched
ON to high beam or when the head lamp flash
is used.
3.28.20 OBD Check Lamp
The OBD check lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and remains
ON till
the engine is started indicating normal
status. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates a potential malfunction.
There may be a malfunction in:
| • | The fuel management system |
| • | The emission control system |
| • | Systems which affect emissions |
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions. Contact an Authorised
Mahindra
Dealer immediately.
3.28.21 EPS Warning Lamp (if equipped)
The EPS warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes
OFF
after about 3 secs. The lamp Indicates malfunction
on Electric Power steering system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
When EPS is failed. vehicle can still be driven
with
increase in steering effort.
3.28.22 Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Lamp
The low engine oil pressure warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is
switched
ON and goes OFF when the engine is started.
If the lamp remains ON even after starting the engine, or illuminates while driving, stop
immediately,
check the oil level
after 2-3 minutes. If low, add engine oil to the “MAX” level and check status. If problem
persists,
contact an Authorised
Mahindra Dealer immediately.
Operating the vehicle with the low oil pressure
warning
lamp ON could cause sudden unexpected engine failure and loss of vehicle
control, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Do not run the engine with low oil pressure warning
indicator ON. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered
by the limited warranty.
3.28.23 Check Engine Lamp
The check engine lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes
out in
3 secs. indicating normal status. The lamp
blinks or illuminates continuously if there is a fault in the engine management system. Switch
OFF the
engine immediately.
Contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for necessary repairs.
3.28.24 Battery Charging System Warning
Lamp
The battery charging system warning lamp illuminates when the battery is not
being
charged or when there is a malfunction
in the alternator.
This lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out as soon
as the
engine is started. If the lamp continues
to remain ON even after starting the engine, it is an indication that the battery is not being
charged
or there is a malfunction
in the alternator. Check the alternator drive belt for looseness/breakage. If the drive belt is
okay,
switch OFF all unnecessary
electrical equipment and recheck. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for further assistance.
3.28.25 High Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning
Lamp
The high engine coolant temperature warning lamp flashes when the coolant
temperature is above 110ºC. It starts to flash
when the temperature reaches 110ºC and will be continuously ON with buzzer alert when the
temperature
reaches 114ºC.
Do not continue driving the vehicle with an
overheated
engine. This may result in engine damage, which will not be covered
by the limited warranty.
3.28.26 Over Speed Warning Lamp
Overspeed warning lamp will start blinking when vehicle speed is above
120kmph.
When speed starts to decrease, lamp will keep
blinking till 114 kmph.
3.28.27 AMT Warning Lamp (if equipped)
The AMT warning lamp illuminates
when
the ignition switch is turned ON and goes out as soon as the engine is started.
In a continues multiple aggressive
launch condition, Clutch over heating possible.
If the clutch is overheated, the
lamp
will blink when you try to drive away the vehicle from standstill condition. The lamp
will go OFF once the clutch temperature is back to normal.
Creep functionality of AMT will be
disabled during the clutch over heating and the same will be restored once the clutch
temperature
returns to Normal. This will prevent further abuse and damage of clutch by
overheating.
If the lamp remains ON even after
starting the engine, or illuminates while driving, there is a possibility of
malfunction
in AMT system. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
In a clutch overheated condition,
the
MIL will blink only when the driver tries to move the vehicle by depressing the
accelerator
pedal but will remain ON if the vehicle is in standstill or
driving.
AMT Warning lamp will blink in
case
of clutch overheating. Follow the below mentioned steps during this condition:
| • | Pull the vehicle to the kerb and STOP the vehicle |
| • | Shift the gear to Neutral |
| • | Wait till the warning lamp turns-OFF |
| • | If the warning lamp keeps blinking and not turning-OFF, Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately |
3.28.28 DPF Indicator Lamp
If the DPF indicator is ON in the engine running condition then DPF
regeneration
has not happened. Follow the instructions
mentioned in the “‘EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM”.
4 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your Vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control system which are as follows.
| 1. | Crankcase emission control system |
| 2. | Evaporative emission control system |
| 3. | Exhaust emission control system |
To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and
maintained by an authorised Mahindra dealer.
4.1 For Petrol vehicles
It is a highly effective system that controls exhaust emissions
from an
engine. It is crucial for meeting emission standards
specified by law.
Your vehicle is equipped with a three-way catalytic converter (TWC)
for
meeting BS VI emission norms.
For optimal functioning of the emission control system, it is
mandatory
to get your vehicle inspected and maintained by a
Authorised Mahindra Dealer. The maintenance schedule in owner’s manual should be followed.
In addition, it is important to use the correct grade of fuel, confirming IS 2796:2017 BS VI specification.
In addition, it is important to use the correct grade of fuel, confirming IS 2796:2017 BS VI specification.
4.1.1 Three-Way Catalytic
Converter
(TWC)
It is an exhaust after treatment component that is designed to
convert
carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC), nitrogen oxides
(NOx) into carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N) and water (H2O).
4.1.2 Gasoline Particulate
Filter
(GPF) (If equipped)
The Gasoline particulate filter (GPF) is an integral part of the
vehicle exhaust gas emission reduction systems, and it removes
the soot (Particulate matter) from the exhaust gas. Unlike a disposable air filter, the GPF is a
regenerative filter. Regeneration
is triggered automatically according to vehicle driving conditions which burns the accumulated
particles/soot from the GPF. The
process is called as GPF Passive Regeneration
In case of any GPF systems failure, OBD MIL lamp turns ON.
Contact
Authorized Mahindra Dealer for further assistance.
Recommended Fuel
| • | Recommend to use Gasoline (Petrol) with 10% Ethanol blend (E10 fuel) or 20% Ethanol blend (E20 fuel) having Research Octane Number (RON) 95 meeting respective BIS specification. |
| • | Usage of higher RON petrol fuel or other branded premium fuel is at your own discretion |
| • | Usage of lower RON fuel than recommended may result in loss of engine performance, power and fuel efficiency. In case of inadvertent use of such fuel, please re-fill / top up with recommended fuel as early as possible. Continuous usage of such lower octane fuel may result in engine knocking, ultimately engine and exhaust system failure. |
| • | Persistent usage of Lower Octane Fuel will create a Risk of damage to Engine & Exhaust System . |
| • | Refill with Petrol of recommended Octane Number as early as possible . |
4.2 For Diesel vehicles
The emission control system is a highly effective system which
controls
exhaust emissions from the engine and crucial for
meeting emission norms specified by law.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following emission control systems for meeting BS VI emission norms.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following emission control systems for meeting BS VI emission norms.
| 1. | Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) |
| 2. | Selective Catalytic Reduction(SCR) |
| 3. | Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) |
To ensure optimal functioning of the emission control systems, it
is
mandatory to get your vehicle inspected and maintained
by a Authorised Mahindra Dealer. The maintenance schedule in the Warranty & Service Information
Guide
need to be followed.
It is also extremely important to use correct grade of fuel,
Confirming
to IS 1460:2017 BS VI Specification.
4.2.1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst
(DOC)
A diesel oxidation catalyst (DOC) is an after-treatment
component that
is designed to convert carbon monoxide (CO) and hydrocarbons
(HC) into carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O).
4.2.2 Selective Catalytic
Reduction(SCR)
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) is an advanced active
emission
control technology system that injects a liquid-reducing
agent through a special catalyst into the exhaust stream of a diesel engine. The reductant is
called
as Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF). The DEF sets off a chemical reaction that converts nitrogen oxides into nitrogen and
water
which is then expelled through
the vehicle tailpipe.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
MaxiCLEAN
To enable the SCR system to work efficiently and to ensure
emission
compliance, it is recommended to use MaxiCLEAN DEF meeting
IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification.
Replenishing DEF is part of regular maintenance service. DEF
consumption is highly dependent on driving conditions/pattern
and it may be necessary to refill the DEF reservoir in-between the scheduled service if need be,
You
are advised to monitor
DEF Indicator Tell Tale and symbols/text messages displayed on the Cluster.
MaxiCLEAN DEF is available at all the Authorised Mahindra
Dealers in
packs of variable capacities. Individual DEF Packs may
have specific filler neck, for filling DEF in the vehicle. While refilling DEF, take care to
avoid
spillage on your body or
outer panels of the vehicle to avoid any stains or inconvenience.
It is unlawful to tamper
with
or remove any component of the after-treatment system. It is strongly recommended not to
use
DEF which does not meet the above specification. Further, this may lead to emission
non-compliance and warranty getting void.
| • | Use Genuine DEF MaxiCLEAN always. |
| • | Incase of non-availability of the above mentioned MaxiCLEAN Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be used. |
| • | Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary specifications and the after treatment system of your vehicle may be damaged. |
| • | Total DEF quantity inside the DEF Tank should never exceed 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component failure. |
| • | DEF quality and purity can be ensured only if it is stored as per recommendations. Hence ensure to store DEF in a cool, dry place. |
| • | Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This may cause damage to the after treatment system. |
| • | While refilling DEF be careful not to allow any foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to get inside the system. These may clog or damage the system. |
| • | While refilling DEF, use only the pipe supplied with the MaxiCLEAN. Do not use any funnel or container. Any contamination with Diesel or oils will cause malfunction of the after treatment system. |
| • | If DEF accidently spill over vehicle components or metal surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF residues will corrode the components, metal surfaces and painted body panels. |
| • | DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel system could get damaged. |
| • | In such a case, do not start the engine and immediately contact nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance. |
Contamination/ Incorrect
DEF:
If incorrect or contaminated fluid is filled inside DEF Tank, contact an authorized
M&M
dealer to determine the appropriate
repair procedure.
Handling of DEF
| • | Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes, or clothing |
| • | Keep DEF out of the reach of children |
| • | In case if any part of the body comes in contact with DEF, clean affected area immediately with plenty of water |
| • | If DEF comes in contact with eyes, flush with plenty of water immediately and seek medical help. |
| • | If DEF is swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water, drink plenty of water immediately and seek medical help. |
| • | Refrain from storing DEF refill containers inside the vehicle. Ammonia vapors may escape from the container which have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, mucous membranes and eyes. Inhaling ammonia vapors may cause irritation to the eyes, nose and throat, as well as cough. |
| • | When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Therefore ensure to refill DEF in a well- ventilated area only. |
| • | If Diesel Exhaust Fluid is spilled on metal surfaces rinse and clean immediately with water. Failure to do so may leave permanent corrosive stains on the metal surfaces which cannot be removed. |
DEF Operating Condition:
DEF will freeze at -11°C (12.2°F). This is a natural phenomenon. The DEF system in the
vehicle
is designed considering this
and does not require any external heating or additives to avoid freezing.
The Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF)
system purges to prevent damage from freezing. Do NOT disconnect battery power within 20
minutes
of switching the ignition key off. Failure to comply may result in vehicle or property
damage.
Refilling DEF: Your
Vehicle
DEF Filler Neck is located beside the Fuel filler Neck. The DEF storage tank is located under
the
body.
Following below are the steps to refill the DEF:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground and switch OFF the ignition.
|
2. Press the key fob unlock button and Press the
fuel
lid gently once to open.
|
3. Rotate the DEF filler cap in anti-clockwise direction and
remove.
4. Fill DEF from the Container Pack. Each container pack has a
unique
mouth and filling provision. Ensure utilizing the same
to avoid spillage. Example. 10 Liter Pack provided with filler tube.
5. Fill DEF as required. Maximum Storage capacity is 20 liters.
Minimum quantity to be filled is 6.0 liters.
6. Rinse with water or use sponge wetted with water to clean the
components/surfaces in case the DEF spills over.
7. Put the DEF filler cap back in its place and tighten in the
clockwise direction, then close the fuel lid shut.
8. Switch the ignition ON
9. Verify that there is no warning regarding DEF low level. If
the DEF
Level Low warning is still appearing, check if enough
quantity is filled, If still problem persist contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer
immediately.
10. DEF is being monitored through diagnostic tool during
regular
service at dealership and the required quantity will be
filled accordingly.
It is highly recommended to DEF filling always at Ignition
off
condition only
SCR Alerts
Introduction
DEF telltale will turn ON and an error message with code will be
displayed on the cluster screen due to any of the following
reasons:
| • | DEF level low |
| • | Incorrect DEF detected |
| • | DEF dosing malfunction |
It is unlawful to
tamper
with or remove any component of the after-treatment system. It is strongly
recommended not
to use
DEF which does not meet the specification. Further, this may lead to emission
non-compliance and warranty getting void.
DEF Level Indication
When DEF level in the tank falls below pre-defined values,
warnings
are flashed in stages as explained below:
Irrespective of the warning stages, once DEF level is low, a
minimum
of 6.0 liters of DEF needs to be filled. If the warnings
continue even after refill, contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
|
E31
|
E32
|
E33
|
|
|
|
|
E34
|
E35
|
|
|
|
In absence of DEF
level low
warning, refilling is not recommended.
Total DEF quantity
inside
the DEF Tank should never be more than 20 liters. Overfilling may result in
system/component
failure.
Only an Authorised Mahindra Dealer will be able to correctly determine the quantity of
DEF
present inside the tank. Hence
if you are refilling the DEF yourself, fill only 6.0 liters in case the DEF Low level
warning
is flashed.
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF
level, refill the DEF
tank. Failure to refill may cause engine start
restriction.
DEF Quality
If SCR system detects the quality of DEF inside the tank is not
meeting IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification, warnings will
be flashed in stages as explained below:
|
E11
|
E12
|
E13
|
|
|
|
|
E14
|
E15
|
|
|
|
If the DEF warning lamp turns on due to the DEF
quality, visit the nearest
Authorised Mahindra dealer to have this repaired.
Failure to repair the system may cause the engine start
restriction.
DEF Dosing
Malfunction
If SCR system detects any malfunction due to failures in
components or
tampering, warnings are flashed in stages as explained
below:
|
E21
|
E22
|
E23
|
|---|---|---|
|
|
|
|
E24
|
E25
|
|
|
|
If the DEF telltale turns on due to dosing
malfunction, visit an
Authorised Mahindra Dealer to have this repaired. Failure
to repair the system may cause engine start
restriction.
4.2.3 Diesel Particulate
Filter
(DPF) (If equipped)
The Diesel
particulate
filter (DPF) is an integral part of the vehicle exhaust gas emission reduction systems
and it
removes
the soot (Particulate matter) from the exhaust gas. Unlike a disposable air filter, the
DPF
is a regenerative filter. Regeneration
is triggered automatically according to vehicle driving conditions which burns the
accumulated particles/soot from the DPF.
The process is called as DPF Active
Regeneration.
However, if the vehicle is driven in the below conditions
continuously for long time, then the accumulated soot may not be
automatically removed because of low exhaust gas temperatures.
1. Heavy traffic driving conditions, especially in the city
2. Frequent short trips
3. Low speed for a long time
When more than a certain amount of soot gets deposited, the DPF
telltale turns ON along with the DPF clogged alert.
|
|
|
If the DPF lamp turns ON or Blinking along with “REGEN” lamp ON in Cluster while driving the vehicle,
then it
indicates DPF regeneration has not occurred successfully, and regeneration
needs to be done through a specific methodology.
|
Stages of DPF
clogging & Remedial Action
|
|
Stage 1: DPF is Starting to
Choke
|
Symbol
|
Warning
Lamp Status
|
Cluster
Indication
|
Action to
be Taken
|
|
|
ON
|
"DPF Clogged" with "REGEN Required" / "REGEN
REQUIRE"
|
1. Perform Drive
Regeneration (Refer Drive Regeneration section in this chapter)
OR
2. Perform Park
Regeneration (Refer Park Regeneration section in this chapter)
OR
3. Take the vehicle to Mahindra Authorized Dealer
|
|
|
ON
|
||
|
|
OFF
|
Stage 2: DPF almost fully
choked
|
Symbol
|
Warning
Lamp Status
|
Cluster
Indication
|
Action to
be Taken
|
|
|
Blinking
|
"DPF Clogged" with "REGEN Required" / "REGEN
REQUIRE"
|
1. Perform Park
Regeneration (Refer Park Regeneration section in this chapter)
OR
2. Take the vehicle to Mahindra Authorized Dealer
|
|
|
ON
|
||
|
|
OFF
|
Stage 3: DPF fully
choked
|
Symbol
|
Warning
Lamp Status
|
Cluster
Indication
|
Action to
be Taken
|
|
|
Blinking
|
"DPF Clogged" with "REGEN Required" / "REGEN
REQUIRE"
|
Take the vehicle to Mahindra Authorized Dealer
|
|
|
OFF
|
||
|
|
ON
|
||
|
Driving the vehicle for
more
distance in "Stage 3: DPF fully choked" may cause irreparable
damage
to diesel particulate filter.
|
|||
Types of Regeneration
There are two types of regeneration which can be performed as
per the
above-mentioned stages
1. Drive
Regeneration:
Drive Regeneration can be done during stage 1 of DPF clogging.
To perform drive regeneration, take vehicle to highway and drive
for
20–30 mins @ speeds above 60 kms/hr until DPF and
REGEN lamp turns OFF in cluster.
2. Park Regeneration
Park Regeneration can be done during Stage 1 and Stage 2 of DPF
clogging.
To perform Park Regeneration vehicle is in stationary condition
only.
It can be triggered only if "REGEN" tell-tale is ON
in
cluster along with DPF lamp ON / Blinking. Process is
as
under:
Follow the below procedure to perform Park Regeneration
| • | Park the vehicle safely in a well ventilated levelled open space and free of any flammable material |
| • | Shift the gear lever to Neutral with the engine running and apply the parking brake and following the steps mentioned in the table below. |
Park Regeneration
|
Steps
|
Switch
|
Cluster
with TFT Type
|
Cluster
with LCD Type
|
|---|---|---|---|
|
Step 1: Navigating to “Regen Required” screen in
cluster by pressing “TRIP” switch in center console
|
Press TRIP switch and toggle till “REGEN
Required”
screen is seen
|
"DPF is clogged" & "REGEN Required" message
will be
displayed in cluster
|
"REGEN Require" message will be displayed
|
|
|
|
|
|
|||
|
Step 2: Triggering Park regeneration using “SET”
switch
on center console
|
Long press SET switch till “REGEN Requested”
screen is
observed in cluster display
|
"REGEN Requested" message will be displayed in
cluster
display
|
"REGEN REQUEST" message will be displayed in
cluster
display
|
|
|
|
|
|
Step 3: Engine idle speed will increase
indicating
Regeneration in progress with “REGEN START” message in cluster display
|
"REGEN Started" message will be displayed in
cluster
|
"REGEN START" will be displayed in cluster
|
|
|
|
||
|
Step 4: Park regeneration can take up to 30
minutes to
complete. Once completed the “REGEN COMPLETE” message will be displayed
in cluster. DPF lamp & REGEN lamp will also turn OFF
|
"REGEN complete" message will be displayed in
cluster
display
|
"REGEN complete" message will be displayed in
cluster
display
|
|
|
|
| • | Park regeneration is only possible when the REGEN telltale is ON in the instrument cluster |
| • | Park the vehicle safely in a well ventilated levelled open space and free of any flammable material |
| • | Park Regeneration process may not start if
certain
conditions are not satisfied and “REGEN
NOT
STARTED” message will appear in Cluster display
 |
| • | Park Regeneration process may get aborted in
between if certain conditions are not met and “REGEN ABORTED” message will appear in Cluster display
|
| • | Park Regeneration process may not start if CHECK ENGINE LAMP or OBD are ON in the cluster. Take vehicle to Mahindra Authorised dealer for assistance. |
| • | When Park Regeneration is happening do not press the Accelerator, Brake or Clutch pedals as this will cancel the regeneration process. |
| • | When Park regeneration is happening switching off the ignition will cancel the regeneration process. The park regeneration process may not start if requested when the engine is switched ON again. Take the vehicle to highway and drive for 20-30 minutes at speeds above 60 km/hr until DPF warning lamp turns OFF. |
| • | Continuous driving with DPF tell-tale blinking may lead to failure of exhaust system components. |
| • | In case of an emergency where in the Park Regeneration process needs to be interrupted/aborted, press the Clutch/Brake/Accelerator pedal or turn off the ignition switch. Park regeneration can be resumed from the beginning if the DPF tell-tale is ON/Blinking. |
During the regeneration process, take care the vehicle is not
near
any flammable materials as you may observe hot emission
gases from exhaust pipe.
In order to avoid burns & personal injury, stay yourself
away
from exhaust system.
Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by
local
jurisdiction while doing forced regeneration.
Diesel Fuel
It is recommended to use the automotive diesel fuel
confirming to
IS 1460: 2017 spec only.
If the diesel fuel with high sulfur content (more than 10
PPM) and
unspecified additives are used, it can cause the DPF system
damage and emission warranty issues.
4.3 Instrument Cluster Telltales
for DPF
& SCR Systems
Do's & Don’ts
Selective Catalytic Reduction
(SCR)
| • | Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) complying to IS 17042 (or) ISO 22241 specification can be used. |
| • | Never attempt to use agricultural grade urea mixed with water. Agricultural grade urea does not meet the necessary specifications and the after-treatment system of your vehicle may be damaged. |
| • | Do not add urea to DEF and do not dilute with water. This may cause damage to the treatment system. |
| • | Total DEF quantity inside the DEF tank should never exceed 20 liters. Overfilling may result in system/component failure. |
| • | While refilling DEF inside tank be careful not to allow any foreign particles, liquids, wiping paper/clothing fibers or lint to get inside the system. These may clog or damage the system. |
| • | DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If DEF is mixed with the diesel fuel, engine/fuel system could get damaged |
| • | If DEF is spilled over vehicle components and metal surfaces, rinse with water or wipe off with sponge and water. DEF residues will corrode the components and metal surfaces, painted body panels |
| • | Do not refill the DEF with Engine ON or ignition ON state |
| • | When opening the DEF filler cap, ammonia vapors may escape. Refill DEF in a well - ventilated area only. |
| • | Ensure that DEF does not come into contact with skin, eyes, or clothing |
Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF)
During the regeneration process, ensure not to park the vehicle
near any
flammable materials as you may observe hot emission
gases from exhaust pipe.
To avoid burns & personal injury, keep yourself away from
exhaust
system.
Follow speed limits & traffic regulations as defined by local
jurisdiction while driving.
5 OPENING AND CLOSING THE VEHICLE
XUV 300 comes with RKE or PKE depending on the variant.
|
Your key tag
number is given on the tag attached to the key. It is recommended that you
record
the key tag number and store
in a safe place. The keys operate all locks in your vehicle including those of
the
doors and ignition with steering lock.
|
Never leave the key in
the
ignition switch with children in the vehicle. A child could switch on the ignition, start
the
engine,
operate power windows and other controls, or move the vehicle, resulting in personal
injuries to
the by stander and/or children
seated inside.
5.1 Doors
5.1.1 To Open a Door from
Inside
|
Pull the door lever away from the door and push
the
door outward to open.
|
5.1.2 To Open a Door from
Outside
|
Pull the door handle firmly outwards to unlock
and
swing the door open.
|
5.1.3 Locking / Unlocking
Individual
Doors from Inside
Individual doors can be locked/unlocked from inside by the
respective
door lock tabs. Lift the lock tab outwards to unlock
or press the tab inwards to lock that particular door.
|
A :
Lock
|
B :
Unlock
|
Locking the driver door
from
inside activates the central locking system, thereby locking/unlocking ALL the doors of
the
vehicle.
Refer to Central Locking section for further details.
5.1.4 Manual Locking /
Unlocking
Doors from Outside
The driver door can be manually locked/unlocked from outside by
using
conventional key. The key is bi-directional; you can
insert it into the keyhole either way. Turn the key anti-clockwise to lock or clockwise to
unlock the
door.
|
A : Lock
|
B : Unlock
|
A keyhole is provided in
the
driver door to lock/unlock the doors manually from outside.
Locking the driver door
from
outside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the
vehicle.
Refer
to Central Locking section for further details.
5.1.5 Locking / Unlocking the
Back
Door
|
The tailgate is locked/unlocked when
locking/unlocking
the doors.
To open the tailgate, press the switch located on
the
inner side of the tailgate door handle.
|
Now tailgate is unlocked lift it up
|
With
Remote
|
Press the tailgate release button to unlock only
the
tailgate when the vehicle is locked.
|
| • | Before closing the tailgate, ensure that none of your body parts are trapped. Also, because the tailgate is heavy, it might unexpectedly fall down and close. To prevent any injury, close the tailgate with caution |
| • | The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate |
| • | Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained |
| • | If you drive with the tailgate open, you will draw dangerous exhaust fumes into your vehicle which can cause serious injury or death to vehicle occupants. If you must drive with the tailgate open, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air comes into the vehicle |
Cargo can fall out of an open tailgate while the vehicle is
in
motion, resulting in an unexpected accident. Do not travel
with the tailgate open.
Make sure that you close the tailgate before driving.
Possible
damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached
objects if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.
Remove any obstacles to interrupt closing the tailgate
securely.
5.2 Tailgate Safety Release Lever
Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release
lever
located on the bottom of the tailgate. When someone
is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment.
You can open the tailgate inside the vehicle.
| 1. | Open the cover.
|
| 2. | To unlock the tailgate, push the emergency safety
release lever inside the trim panel to right side.
|
| 3. | Push the tailgate to open. |
| • | Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion |
| • | For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency tailgate safety release lever in this vehicle and how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally locked in the luggage compartment |
| • | Do not allow children to play in cargo area. If they open the tailgate with the opening lever abruptly, it may cause a serious personal injury |
| • | No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time. The luggage compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash |
5.3 Central Locking System
All doors of the vehicle can be simultaneously locked or unlocked
from
the driver door and with the switch provided in quadruple
switch.
5.3.1 Central Locking /
Unlocking
All Doors from Outside
To manually lock/unlock all the doors from outside using the
conventional key, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise respectively
in the driver door keyhole.
|
|
A : Lock
B : Unlock
|
If any doors are open
when
central locking is activated, the system locks the open doors when they are closed.
Central locking ALL the
doors
in the vehicle can also be done using the Remote key. Refer the relevant sections in this
chapter
for more details.
5.3.2 Central Locking /
Unlocking
All Doors from Inside
Press the driver door lock tab down (A) to lock or lift the lock
tab
up (B) to unlock all doors simultaneously.
|
A :
Lock
|
B :
Unlock
|
5.3.3 Child Safety Rear Door
Lock
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right side child safety
rear
door locks. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the rear
door(s) cannot be opened from the inside. The door(s) can only be opened from the outside.
To activate the child safety right rear door lock, insert the key and rotate towards anti-clockwise direction.
To de-activate the child safety right rear door lock, insert the key and rotate towards clockwise direction.
To activate the child safety right rear door lock, insert the key and rotate towards anti-clockwise direction.
To de-activate the child safety right rear door lock, insert the key and rotate towards clockwise direction.
|
A :
Lock
|
B :
Unlock
|
If the rear doors are not
operable from inside, ensure that the child safety locks have been disabled.
Mahindra strongly
recommends
that the child safety rear door locks be used whenever there are children travelling in
the rear
seat.
5.4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
|
A
|
LED
|
C
|
Tailgate open / Search
|
|
B
|
Lock
|
D
|
Unlock
|
5.4.1 Precautions while
Handling
Remote Key
| • | Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves |
| • | Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight |
| • | Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer |
5.4.2 Remote Key Status LED
LED present on Remote would be indicating the user about the
Remote
lock/unlock/trunk button input and also health of Remote
battery.
5.4.3 To Lock and Arm the
Vehicle
with RKE
|
Press the LOCK button on the RKE for locking and
arming
the vehicle.
|
Hazard lamps flash once -
if all the doors in the vehicle are locked and armed successfully using RKE.
Hazard lamps flash five
times
along with an alarm - if any of the doors (including bonnet) in the vehicle are open.
If alarm is in mute
condition
the Hazard lamps will flash. To press Lock & Unlock button together to un-mute the
alarm.
Now
still Hazard lamps flash and alarm will work.
5.4.4 Unlock and Disarm the
Vehicle
with RKE
|
Press the UNLOCK button on the RKE to unlock and
disarm
the vehicle.
|
Hazard lamps flash twice -
if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
Hazard lamps flash four
times
along with an alarm - if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.
Upon the remote lock, if
any of
the doors are not closed properly or are left open, the hazard lamps will flash five times
to indicate the same.
5.4.5 Auto Locking
All doors will get locked automatically when;
| • | All doors are closed properly |
| • | Vehicle speed is greater than 20 kmph |
Auto Locking ON DOOR OPEN —
Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the autolock will
reactivate
only if all doors are closed,
the vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 20 kmph
Auto Locking ON MASTER
ACTUATOR
UNLOCK — Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the
autolock
will reactivate only if all doors are closed,
the vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 20 kmph
5.4.6 Auto Unlocking
Auto Unlock of all doors will happen in the following conditions
;
| • | When Ignition is switched from ON to OFF, OR |
| • | In the event of a crash (only on Airbag Variants) |
5.4.7 Auto Re-locking
Auto Re-lock of all doors will happen when;
| • | No door status change for 45 sec after unlocking the vehicle using RKE/PKE |
5.4.8 Search Function
|
Press the Tailgate button on the RKE 2 times
within 2
sec to locate the vehicle in a parking lot.
|
Search alarm can also bring attention to the vehicle and
surrounding
area, warning about an intruder or seek for help.
When the SEARCH function is ON, the hazard lamps flash along
with an
alarm for 30 sec. In this mode;
| • | Pressing any button on the RKE again switches OFF the alarm |
| • | Pressing the UNLOCK button switches OFF the alarm and disarms/unlocks all doors |
The search function works
both
during the Locked/Unlocked conditions of the vehicle.
5.4.9 Mute/Un-mute Function
|
The chirps can be muted / un-muted. Press the
LOCK
& UNLOCK buttons together for 3 sec. to toggle between MUTE/UN-MUTE mode.
|
Hazard lamps will flash once to indicate un-mute to mute
condition.
Hazard lamp & chrip will flash once to indicate Mute to
un-mute.
In the un-muted
condition,
alarm chirps can be heard during Auto Re-lock (1 Chirp), RKE Lock when door open (5
Chirps) and
RKE Unlock if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period (4 Chirps).
In the mute condition,
only
hazard would flash and alarm chirps would not be audible.
5.4.10 Theft Alarm
Vehicle enters into alarm mode when there is a change in door
status/ignition status provided the vehicle was locked through
RKE.
Hazard Lamp and Alarm will flash 27 seconds.
After the alarm period, there will not be any alarm again till
any
further change in the door/ignition status.
The security system
(alarm)
will be activated only when the vehicle is locked using the RKE/PKE. Locking the doors
with the
mechanical key will not trigger the alarm.
When the vehicle is armed
by
RKE, opening the door from the inside by operating the door inner handle or opening the
door
from the outside using the key will be treated as unauthorized activating the vehicle
security
alarm. If this occurs, the
alarm can be disarmed by either pressing the ‘UNLOCK’ button on the RKE or turning ON the
ignition followed by a successful
authentication.
5.4.11 RKE Operating Range
|
Using RKE, you can lock/arm or unlock/disarm the
vehicle from distances approximately 9 m (30 ft) This is in open area.
|
If there is reduction in
RKE
range, please follow the steps below:
| • | Check the distance: The RKE may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or bad weather |
| • | Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the RKE higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a radio transmitter such as radio station tower, airport transmitter, mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in range of RKE |
| • | Check the RKE battery: See battery replacement procedure, given later in this section |
| • | If the RKE is still not working correctly, contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer |
5.5 Smart Key System/Passive
Keyless
Entry (PKE) (if equipped)
Smart Key System enables you to enter or exit your vehicle without
the
need to manually lock/unlock the doors. You can start/stop,
lock or unlock the vehicle using Smart Key. To do this, you only need to carry the Smart Key with
you.
|
A : LED
B : Lock
C : Tailgate open / Search
D : Unlock
E : Mechanical key release button
|
Remote Key Panic alarm
feature is
not available in Smart Key variants.
The front side of the Smart Key has three control buttons: Lock (B)
and
Tail Gate / Search button (C), Unlock (D). There is
also a emergency key release button (E), which releases a mechanical key for emergency purposes
(E.g.
when PKE battery is
low).
|
Press the mechanical key release button to open the
key
blade.
|
| • | When locking or unlocking with Smart Key, the distance between the Smart Key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3ft (1m). |
| • | Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves |
| • | Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight |
| • | Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer |
| • | The Smart Key can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity |
5.5.1 Locking/Unlocking using
Smart
key
Carrying the Smart Key along with you, you can lock or unlock
the
doors and tail door and even start and stop the engine without
inserting the key. Functions of the buttons on a Smart Key is similar to the remote keyless
entry.
Locking the vehicle:
| 1. | Carry the Smart Key |
| 2. | Close all the doors |
| 3. | Press the button in the door handle
|
| 4. | The hazard warning lights will blink with alarm once to indicate the locking (5 blinks will be provided if engine hood is open while locking) |
| 5. | Make sure that the doors are locked by pulling at the outside door handles |
| • | Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7m from the outside door handle |
| • | Vehicle can be locked centrally by pressing the button in the door handle nearer to the PKE (PKE should be nearer to the triggered side). E.g., locking/unlocking of the co-driver door is possible only if PKE is around the co-driver area |
| • | Even
after
pressing the outside door handle button, if the doors do not lock, a chime
is
heard for 5 times, then one of the
following situations are true:
|
| • | On attempting to lock by pressing the button in door handle, the chime will sound for 3 times if the steering is not locked |
| • | With the one Smart Key inside, on locking the vehicle using the remote lock button, the key which is kept inside would get deactivated completely for the security of the vehicle. In order to make the key to active again, the vehicle should be unlocked either using Smart Key or by pressing remote unlock |
Unlocking the
vehicle:
| 1. | Carry the Smart Key |
| 2. | Press the button in the door handle |
| 3. | All doors would unlock and hazard warning lights will blink with alarm twice |
| • | Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7m from the outside door handle |
| • | Vehicle can be unlocked centrally by pressing the button in the door handle only when the key is in same side of the door where the button is pressed |
Unlocking the Tail door
alone:
The tailgate is locked/unlocked when locking/unlocking the
doors.
|
|
To open the tailgate, touch the opening switch
inner
side of the tailgate door handle with the tailgate unlocked, and then
lift it up.
|
In theft deterrent mode, you can unlock only the tailgate by
pressing
the tailgate switch with the smart key. The tailgate
will be locked again when closing it.
If the smart key felt inside unknowingly and if tail door
closed, all
the doors will unlock automatically with hazard and
buzzer blinks twice.
| • | Before closing the tailgate, ensure that none of your body parts are trapped. Also, because the tailgate is heavy, it might unexpectedly fall down and close. To prevent any injury, close the tailgate with caution |
| • | The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate |
| • | Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained |
| • | If you drive with the tailgate open, you will draw dangerous exhaust fumes into your vehicle which can cause serious injury or death to vehicle occupants. If you must drive with the tailgate open, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air comes into the vehicle |
Cargo can fall out of an open tailgate while the vehicle is
in
motion, resulting in an unexpected accident. Do not travel
with the tailgate open.
Make sure that you close the tailgate before driving.
Possible
damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached
objects if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.
Remove any obstacles to interrupt closing the tailgate
securely.
5.5.2 Precautions while
Handling
Smart Key
| • | Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves |
| • | Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight |
| • | Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer |
5.5.3 Smart Key Status LED
LED present on Remote would be indicating the user about the
Remote
lock/unlock/trunk button input and also health of Remote
battery.
5.5.4 To Lock and Arm the
Vehicle
with Remote
Press the lock button on the Remote for locking and arming the
vehicle.
When the vehicle is successfully locked and armed using the
Remote,
the hazard lamps and buzzer will flash once.
If there are any doors open, the hazard lamps flash five times
along
with audible beeps indicating the same.
| • | If any of the doors, are open while locking the vehicle with Remote, the vehicle locks all doors (door locks) irrespective of the open door/doors. When the open door(s) is/are closed later, the vehicle is locked and armed |
5.5.5 Unlock and Disarm the
Vehicle
with Remote
Press the unlock button on the Remote to unlock and disarm the
vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked and disarmed using Remote,
Hazard lamps and buzzer flash twice.
5.5.6 Theft Alarm
If there was an unauthorised attempt to open/start the vehicle
by
someone from the time you had locked and armed the vehicle
to the time you press the unlock button of Remote, the hazard lamps flash four times along with
an
alarm indicating the attempt.
If this occurs, press the “UNLOCK” button on the Remote to
disarm the
security alarm.
Using the smart key to
open the
door, when the vehicle was locked and armed with Remote will be treated as unauthorised by
the system setting off the alarm.
When vehicle is armed by
Remote
, opening the door from inside by operating the door inner handle will activate the
vehicle
theft alarm. Press the unlock button on the Remote to cancel the alarm.
5.5.7 Search Function
The search function can be used to locate the vehicle in a
parking
lot. Press the Tail gate or search button on the Remote
for 2 times with in 2 sec. continuously to activate
the
search function.
When the Search function is ON, the hazard lamps and burglar
horn will
flash for approx. 30 secs. helping you to locate your
vehicle. To extend the search, press the search button again which will flash the hazard lamps
and
burglar horn for another
30 secs. Again press the search button on the Remote for more than 1 second or un-lock button on
the
remote to de-activate the search function.
The head lamps also turn
ON
when UNLOCK button is pressed twice (enabling the Lead Me to Vehicle (LMV) feature). For
the
first
UNLOCK command, the doors are unlocked, and for the next UNLOCK command, the head lamps
turn ON
enabling you to safely board/locate
the vehicle in the night.
If horn is in Mute
condition,
only hazard lamps will flash for 30 seconds during search function.
Search function works
both
during Locked/Unlocked conditions of the vehicle.
5.5.8 Auto Locking
This feature enables all doors to lock automatically, when all
doors
are closed and vehicle speed if greater than 20 kmph.
5.5.9 Auto Re-locking (if
applicable)
After unlocking the vehicle using Remote, if none of the doors
are
opened in 45 seconds Auto re-lock of all doors will happen.
5.5.10 Auto Re-lock on Master
Actuator Unlock
Once Auto locking happened and if the Master Actuator was
unlocked at
any vehicle speed, next Auto lock will reoccur when
the vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and again crosses 20 kmph with all the doors in closed
condition.
5.5.11 Auto Re-lock On Any
Door
Open
Once Auto locking is occurred, and if any door is opened when
vehicle
speed is less than 5 kmph, Auto Lock will reoccur
only when vehicle speed crosses 20 kmph in all doors closed and master actuator in lock
condition.
5.5.12 Anti Lockout
This feature will not allow the doors to lock, if any door is
open and
someone tries to lock the doors by using inside master
actuator.
However, if repeatedly attempt to lock for 3 times then, doors
will
get locked.
5.5.13 Auto Unlock On
Ignition OFF
When Ignition is switched off, all doors will get unlocked
automatically, if locked.
There are no visual indications for this operation.
5.5.14 Auto Unlock Upon Crash
In vehicles equipped with airbags, Auto Unlock of doors takes
place in
case of an unfortunate event of an accident and airbags
are deployed.
5.5.15 Thermal Protection
Door lock mechanism does not respond to remote/CDL requests, if
Lock /
Unlock are performed 8 or more times within 20 seconds.
Lock/Unlock will not happen for 20 seconds and after lapse of
this
time limit, it will function normally.
5.5.16 Remote Key Operating
Range
|
|
Using Remote, you can lock/arm or unlock/disarm
the
vehicle from distances approx. 30ft. (9m).
|
If there is reduction in Remote range, please
follow the steps
below:
Check the
distance: The Remote
key may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or
bad
weather
Check the
location: Other
vehicles or objects may be blocking the signals. Take a few steps to the left or
right,
hold the Remote key higher,
and try again. Moreover, closeness to a radio transmitter such as radio station
tower,
airport transmitter, mobile or CB radios
may lead to reduction in range of Remote key
Check the
Remote key battery:
See battery replacement procedure, given later in this
section
If the Remote key is still not working correctly,
contact an Authorised
Mahindra Dealer
5.5.17 Engine START/STOP
Button (If
equipped)
The engine can be started or stopped by the presence of the
Smart Key
inside the vehicle.
Whenever the doors are
opened,
the engine start/stop button will be illuminated and go off after few seconds.
Upon any fault identification by the system in the start/stop
switch,
an alert would be provided in the Instrument cluster.
Please visit the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately to rectify the problem.
Even with the failure in
the
start/stop switch, vehicle's normal function may work which depends on the severity of the
failure.
Please visit the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer to rectify the problem immediately.
Engine start/stop button
positions: To operate the engine start/stop switch to its intended function, Smart Key
should be inside the vehicle.
OFF: To turn off the
engine, stop the vehicle and press the engine start/stop button once. Status LED in the engine
start/stop
button goes OFF to indicate the OFF position.
If the engine is not
switching
off by pressing the engine start/stop button (one press), press and hold the engine
start/stop
button for more than 3 seconds or rapidly press and release the engine start/stop button 3
times
within 3 seconds. On doing
so, the vehicle ignition status is changed to ACC position till 30 seconds, then it will
change
to OFF position. Contact the
nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer at the earliest.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-theft steering
column
lock. The steering wheel locks when the engine start/stop
button is in OFF position to protect against the theft. The steering wheel locks automatically
when
the driver door is opened
or 25 seconds after engine start/stop button changes to OFF position. If the steering wheel is
not
locked properly when you
open the driver door and on attempting to lock the vehicle, a warning chirp along with the
hazard
blinks thrice. Try locking
the steering wheel again (by toggling Engine Start/Stop button). If the problem is not solved,
we
recommend to take the vehicle
to nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately.
ON: To switch ON the
ignition, press the engine start/stop button when the switch position is in OFF/ACC without
depressing
the
brake pedal and with the Smart Key inside the vehicle. Status LED in the engine start/stop
button will
turn Red to indicate
the IGN ON position and the vehicle is ready for starting.
Keeping the vehicle in
ignition
ON position for longer time without engine running, would drain the battery. Turn OFF the
ignition if engine is not to be started.
Vehicle ignition would not turn to ON position on any of the
following
conditions:
| • | If the electronic steering lock is not getting
unlocked
|
| • | Steering wheel not lock warning
|
| • | Electronic Steering lock module (ESCL) not
learned
warning.
|
| • | Steering wheel malfunction warning:
|
| • | If the key is not detected inside the vehicle
or far
away from the driver which is not in detectable position
|
| • | When engine start/stop button is ON or engine
is in
running condition with vehicle at standstill and if any door is opened,
the system checks for the Smart Key. If the Smart Key is not inside the vehicle,
an
alert in the Instrument cluster is displayed
along with a chirp for 5 times to indicate key not detected inside
|
Bring the Smart Key inside the vehicle or keep the key in the
detectable position whenever you are inside the vehicle.
Starting the vehicle :
To
start the engine, press the brake and press the engine start/stop button once with the key
inside the
vehicle. The engine
can be started from any position (OFF / ON) of the start/stop switch.
Ensure the TGS is in
neutral
position before starting.
If engine start/stop
button is
pressed without pressing the brake pedal, engine will not start and the vehicle power
modes
will change as follows: OFF→ ON →OFF→ ON
If the engine start/stop
button
is pressed from the OFF position directly, along with the brake in depressed position,
there
may be a small delay in the engine cranking. This is normal and not to be taken as a
fault.
Never press the engine
start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result
in the
engine
turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to
loss
of direction control and braking
function, leading to an accident.
Once the engine is
started, it
would not stop even if the key is not inside the vehicle. Before leaving the driver seat,
always make sure engine start/stop button is in OFF position and always take the Smart Key
with
you. Vehicle safety and security
would be affected if these precautions are not followed.
Emergency stop: To
turn the
engine OFF in an emergency, press and hold the engine start/stop button for more than 3 seconds
or
panic press
rapidly press and release the engine start/stop button 3 times within 3 seconds. On doing so,
the
vehicle ignition is changed
to ACC position.
BACK up Start: If the
key
fob battery is low, the key may not be detected. In such a situation, press the start/stop
button once
while the
status LED in the button is blinking red color , keep the key in the armrest pocket and then
press the
start/stop switch to
turn ON the IGN & LED will changes to permanent Red.
If key fob battery is detected low by the system, an alert would
be
triggered while turning OFF the ignition. Change the battery
by following the procedure as mentioned in the section for battery replacement.
Key fob battery low can
be
detected only if the key has been continuously used in the vehicle. Keeping the key
outside the
vehicle for longer duration and then using it with the drained battery cannot be detected.
5.5.18 Smart Key Warning
|
|
When a smart key is left inside the vehicle and
all
doors are closed, LCD display shows this message for 5 seconds if you
lock the door using the other smart key.
|
|
|
LCD display shows this message if you leave the
vehicle
with the Smart Key when the engine Start/Stop button is ON or Start
position.
|
|
|
LCD display shows this message for 5 seconds if
the
Smart Key battery is weak when you press the engine Start/Stop button.
Replace the battery with new one.
|
|
|
LCD display shows this message when engine start
fails
due to the battery discharged Smart Key etc.
|
|
|
LCD display shows this message for 5 seconds when
there
is malfunction on the engine Start/Stop button . If the message appears
constantly, bring your vehicle to Authorised Mahindra Dealer for checkup.
|
5.5.19 Vehicle
Locking/Unlocking in
an Emergency Situation
If the Smart Key does
not
operate normally, you can lock or unlock the doors by using the mechanical
key:
| 1. | To remove the mechanical key, press and hold the release button in the side of the key fob and pull the mechanical key head. |
| 2. | Insert the key into the keyhole in the door nearer to the door handle. Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle to unlock and turn it towards the front to lock. |
| 3. | To reinstal the mechanical key, put the key into the key fob and push it until a click is heard |
It is strictly not advisable to leave the key fobs in
the
vehicle. Vehicle can be started by any unauthorised
person.
A maximum of 2 Smart Keys can be registered to a single
vehicle. If you lose a key, we strictly recommend to contact Authorised
Mahindra Dealer immediately to block the lost key and to get a new
key.
The Smart Key may not
work
if any of the following occurs:
| • | The Smart Key is close to a radio station, airport or an area where there is a possibility of large radio transmissions which can interfere with the normal operation of the Smart Key |
| • | The Smart Key is near a mobile or a cellular phone or some electronic gadgets like Laptop/Tablets. The signal from the Smart Key could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smartphone. Avoid placing the Smart Key and your electronic gadgets in the same trouser or jacket pocket or in the bag and maintain adequate distance between the two devices |
| • | Another vehicle Smart Key is being operated close to your vehicle |
| • | Smart Key kept inside the glove box or top bin in the instrument panel may not be detected sometimes. Keep the Smart Key in the visible zone or in your pocket for getting it detected |
| • | Keep the Smart Key away from the water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty |
Make sure the vehicle ignition is in OFF state, whenever
leaving the vehicle even with the key. By keeping the vehicle ignition
in ON/ACC state will hamper the vehicle security.
Do not hand over the Smart Key to any unauthorised
person or
service provider. Your vehicle security system may be compromised
in doing so.
5.5.20 If Smart Key is Lost
If you have lost the
programmed Smart key, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for procuring a new Smart
key.
While programming a
new key
set, you will have to submit all the keys available with you, to an Authorised Mahindra
Dealer.
Please note that there is a limitation
(max.
2 keys at a time) to the number of keys that can be ordered. The minimum timeframe
required to supply the duplicate keys is 20 days after all the formalities are
completed.
Please contact the Authorised Mahindra
Dealer to understand the formalities involved.
If
you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to deactivate the theft detent
devices or start the engine.
If
the key is stolen or lost, communicate to an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for
de-activating
the function of the lost or stolen
key. This is essential to avoid unauthorised access using the misplaced
key.
Only
Smart key transmitters programmed to your vehicle electronics can be used for remote
locking and unlocking of your vehicle.
5.6 Remote Battery Replacement
If the Remote operation is inconsistent when any of the buttons are
pressed, then it indicates that the Remote battery is
weak.
The rear side of the Remote is snap fitted. Flip open the key blade
and
use two fingers on the side of the fob and gently
pry open the battery cover.
Use a small flat head screwdriver to gently pry battery to remove
out and
discard the same. Insert new batteries of 3V type
(Battery No. 2032). While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face
up.
Align both the halves
of the Remote casing and press to snap fit. Check operation of the Remote.
While prying the Remote
case, take
care not to damage the battery.
Do not touch the battery
terminals
that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Pull out the battery and
discard
the same. Insert new battery of same type. While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive
side of the batteries face up. Align both the halves of the Remote and screw to tight fit.
Check
operation of the Remote.
The Batteries are Li Ion batteries. They should be kept away from
children.
This product contains a lithium button cell. If the button cell
is
swallowed, severe internal burns can occur within a mere
two hours and lead to death.
Keep new or removed batteries away from children. If the battery
compartment does not close securely, discontinue use and
keep away from children.If you think that batteries have been swallowed or are stuck in any part
of
the body, seek medical
help immediately.
5.8 PKE Center Console Antenna in
Back
Up Mode
The Key fob is to be kept as in the above image (Key fob logo
should be
facing tailgate) under the armrest, when the system
requests, like in the case of the below error message in the instrument cluster.
|
|
This message is displayed only when the PKE system
fails
to detect the key fob which is inside the vehicle when the user is
trying to Switch ON the ignition.
|
On pressing the Start/Stop switch 1st time with the key fob
under the
armrest. The Start-stop switch LED will blink in red
color, with the above error message will be displayed again in the cluster.
In this case, if you press the Start/Stop switch again before
the
above error message in the instrument cluster goes away
the 2nd time, the vehicle will start in Back-Up mode, if the Clutch(MT)/Brake(AMT) pedal is
pressed.
5.9 If PKE/RKE Key fob is Lost
If you have lost the programmed PKE/RKE Key fob , contact Mahindra
Authorised Dealer for procuring a new Smart Key.
While programming a new key set, you will have to submit all the
keys
available with you, to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Please note that there is a
limitation (max. 2 keys at a time) to the number of keys that can be ordered. The minimum
timeframe
required to supply the duplicate keys is 10 days after all the formalities are completed.
Please
contact the Mahindra Authorised
Dealer to understand the formalities involved.
If you make your own
duplicate
key, you will not be able to deactivate the anti-theft devices or start the engine.
If the key is stolen or
lost,
communicate to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for de-activating the function of the lost or
stolen
key. This is essential to avoid unauthorised access using the misplaced key.
Only PKE/RKE transmitters
programmed to your vehicle electronics can be used for remote locking and unlocking of your
vehicle.
5.10 Theft Detent Warning System
Arming of Vehicle: Once
all
the doors are closed and locked with remote by pressing lock button, Theft Detent warning system
would
get activated.
Theft Detent Trigger: If
any
one tries to manipulate the Ignition or manually opens the doors or manually unlocks the doors,
Theft
Detent warning
system alarm is activated by blinking the turn lamps and blowing Burglar horn for 27 secs. Once the
alarm
is triggered, it
can be disabled by pressing unlock button on remote or switching on the Ignition by using valid
key.
5.11 Key Fob Limitations
When the vehicle key fob is not working properly, It may be due to
Radio
Frequency (RF) interference caused by an external
source like transformer, Amateur Radio, etc.. which emits power levels that is higher than the
vehicle Key Fob. This interference
may be resulting in RF signal not being received by RKE/PKE system controller.
Customer may not get Panic due to this non-function of key fob.
After
moving from the interference Zone, Key Fob may start
working properly.
If still key fob not working then contact Mahindra Authorised
service
center for assistance.
5.12 Engine Immobiliser System
An Engine Immobiliser System is a security system that prevents the
vehicle from being operated by an unauthorised person.
The Engine immobiliser prevents the engine from being started unless it recognizes signals from the
correct coded key. When
a wrong key is inserted or a theft attempt is detected, the alarm is set off, and the hazard lamps
flash
along with a siren.
The system is automatically activated when the key is removed from
the
ignition.
5.12.1 Features of the
Immobiliser
System:
| • | Prevents the vehicle being started by anyone not in possession of the correct vehicle key |
| • | The vehicle is automatically protected after the key is removed from the ignition/vehicle in PKE. At every ignition ON, if the vehicle does not recognize the correct key code, the engine check lamp will blink and security tell tale lamp will illuminate and the engine cannot be started. |
| • | The vehicle will not be protected until the key has been taken out of the ignition/vehicle in PKE. |
If the engine check lamp flashes or remains continuously
illuminated after the ignition being switched ON, there is a system
malfunction. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
immediately.
With the correct
coded key
in the vehicle and pressing the SSS ON, automatically recognizes and authenticates the
system.
It enables the engine to start.
In the event of
the
vehicle not starting with the correct key, switch off the ignition for a minimum of
1
minute and attempt
to start the vehicle again.
Do not modify,
remove or
disassemble the engine immobiliser system. Any unauthorised changes or modifications
can
affect proper
operation of the system and will void your warranty.
The security
system will
be activated when the vehicle is locked using the PKE/RKE key fob. Locking the doors
with
the manual
key will also activate the security system.
Using the ignition key blade to open the diver door, when the vehicle was locked and armed with PKE/RKE key fob, in this condition if any of the door is opened which results in door switch status change will be treated as unauthorised by the system setting and this will trigger the alarm. Press the unlock button on the PKE/RKE key fob to off the alarm.
Using the ignition key blade to open the diver door, when the vehicle was locked and armed with PKE/RKE key fob, in this condition if any of the door is opened which results in door switch status change will be treated as unauthorised by the system setting and this will trigger the alarm. Press the unlock button on the PKE/RKE key fob to off the alarm.
5.13 Opening and Closing the Hood
The hood release lever is located in the driver side footwell area,
below
the instrument panel. To open hood follow the steps
below:
|
1. Pull the lever below the driver side instrument
panel
to release the hood.
|
2. Lift the hood a little to access the safety latch holding the
hood
striker. This safety latch is located below the hood
at the centre.
|
3. Lift the safety latch and lift the hood.
|
|
4. Hood is supported by a stay rod. Lift the safety
latch
and lift the hood.
|
| • | Do not open the hood immediately after a drive; the engine compartment will be very hot |
| • | Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched properly, the hood could open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, resulting in an accident |
| • | Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed |
To close the hood, follow the below steps:
| 1. | Remove the stay rod supporting the hood by slightly lifting the hood |
| 2. | Bring the hood near to its self-opening/closing position |
| 3. | Now, push the hood to close and ensure the primary latch is engaged |
| 4. | Before driving off, check hood is locked properly with primary latch fully engaged |
Bonnet Open Hazard - When
the
bonnet is open and vehicle is in unlock condition:
| • | Hazard lamps flash continuously to alert the user that the bonnet is open |
| • | Hazard cluster telltale also flashes |
To stop the warning, do any one of the following:
— Close the bonnet
— Press the hazard button TWICE
— Change the turn signal stalk position
— Drive the vehicle > 10 kmph
5.14 Fuel-Lid Opening and Closing
Open the fuel filler door by pulling up the release lever located
on the
lower left side of the driver seat.
Open the fuel filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Hang the fuel filler cap on the holder mounted on the back of the
lid.
After refuelling, turn the cap clockwise until you
hear a “click”, and close the lid by pushing it back.
6 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS I
6.1 Control Switches
The driver door switch bank is located on the driver door
armrest/handle
and controls and the various functions:
|
A
|
ORVM Folding/Unfolding Switch
|
|
B
|
Aiming Switch
|
|
C
|
Driver Door Window Switch
|
|
D
|
Rear RH Window Switch
|
|
E
|
Door Lock/Unlock Switch
|
|
F
|
Window Lock Switch
|
|
G
|
Rear LH Window Switch
|
|
H
|
Passenger’s Window Switch
|
|
I
|
Mirror Selection Switch
|
6.1.1 Driver Door Power
Window
Switch
Power windows can be operated only when the ignition is “ON”
position.
Power Window Control after
IGN OFF
- The power window control will be available for 30 seconds after IGN OFF condition.
The driver can operate all the power windows in the vehicle
through
the quadruple switch on the driver door armrest/handle.
|
|
Other passengers in the vehicle can raise or lower their
respective
window glasses individually by using the separate switches
provided on each of the door trim pads/armrests.
To lower/raise the window glass push/pull, the power window
switches
respectively.
Do not operate the power
windows frequently. This will drain the vehicle battery.
If you operate the
switches
often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain
duration
to prevent damage due to overheating. The system will return to normal functioning
shortly.
It is recommended to
operate
one window switch at a time.
While operating the power
windows, check for obstructions like head, hand, etc. which may lead to personal
injuries.
6.1.2 Power Window Lock Switch
The main power window quadruple switch in the driver door trim
has a
power window lock switch to enable or disable operation
of rear passenger window switches.
|
To disable the rear passenger power windows,
press the
window lock switch down.
To revert to normal operation, press the window
lock
switch again.
|
6.1.3 Door Lock/Unlock Switch
|
The Door lock/unlock switch is located on the
driver
door trim. Driver can simultaneously lock/unlock all the doors by pressing
this switch as shown in the image.
|
6.1.4 Smart Power Window with
Anti-Pinch
This is applicable for driver door only (if equipped)
Smart power window is one of the significant safety features
with the
anti-pinch function, which automatically reverses the
direction of glass if an obstruction is detected during the auto up mode.
|
This feature consists of three functions:
|
Auto UP
Pull the power window switch up for a moment and release. The
glass
moves all the way up automatically. You do not need to
hold the switch till the glass closes.
Auto DOWN
Press the power window switch down for a moment and release. The
glass
moves all the way down automatically. You do not need
to hold the switch till the glass comes down.
Anti-Pinch during Auto
UP
During Auto UP if any obstacle is detected with the force value
ranging between 70~100 N (~7-10 kg), the controller senses
the load and reverses the direction of the glass to downward direction for almost full stroke
length.
If the force against the
glass
is less than the specified value, then this function does not operate. So, While operating
the power windows, check for obstructions like head, hand, etc. which may lead to severe
personal injuries.
If power window anti-pinch is used continuously for more than
20
times, the power window express feature will have thermal
cut off and it will not operate for 20 seconds and after that for one cycle it will operate
and
once the temperature comes
to nominal, then it will start operating normally.
Extended Power Window
All doors power windows can be rolled UP/DOWN within 30 seconds
after
ignition off.
6.2 Mirrors
6.2.1 Manual ORVM (if
equipped)
|
Exterior Rear view mirror on both left and right
sides
provides the maximum side rear view information to the driver.
|
Both the ORVMs are hinged and can be manually folded or
unfolded. This
avoids hindrances in narrow areas and parking slots.
Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support, while folding or unfolding.
Objects seen in convex mirrors are much closer than they
appear. Do
not overestimate the distance of the objects that you
see in the mirrors.
6.2.2 Electric Adjustable ORVM
(If
equipped)
|
|
The electric exterior mirror adjustment switch is located on the
driver door trim/handle. The joystick on the switch can be
used to select the left/right mirror and also to adjust the respective mirror.
6.2.3 ORVM - Manual Adjustment
(if
equipped)
|
To adjust the mirror, Press the mirror on four
corner
and achieve desirable view.
|
6.2.4 ORVM Folding/Unfolding
(if
equipped)
Mirror Fold Function:
To
fold the ORVM assembly, press towards the right side of the switch with ignition ON condition.
ORVM folds automatically when:
| • | The doors locked with the remote from outside the vehicle |
For Auto fold function, the switch should be in neutral
position.
|
|
Mirror Unfold Function:
To
unfold the ORVM assembly, press towards the left side of the switch with ignition ON condition.
|
|
ORVM unfolds automatically when:
| • | Mirror is already in folded condition and ORVM switch is neutral condition and IGN is turned ON |
6.3 Interior Rearview Mirror (IRVM)
The interior rearview mirror provides the rearview information to
the
driver and also aids during reversing.
6.3.1 Anti-Glare Auto
Adjustment
Function (if equipped)
|
|
|
A
|
IRVM
|
D
|
Indicator
|
|
B
|
Brightness
|
E
|
Front Sensor
|
|
C
|
Anti-glare auto adjustment ON/OFF switch
|
||
The reflection rate of the inside rearview mirror can be
automatically
adjusted by the light intensity from a vehicle behind
you by pressing the anti-glare auto adjustment switch.
While pressing the switch, its corresponding indicator comes on.
Pressing the switch once more turns off the indicator and
deactivates the function.
| • | Under the following conditions, automatic anti-glare function may not operate properly |
| • | When the rear vehicle’s headlamp is not beamed directly to the inside rearview mirror’s sensor |
| • | When the rear window has a dark tinted glass |
| • | When the gear selector lever is in the R position, automatic antiglare function will be cancelled to obtain the best rearview |
| • | For your safety, never adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion |
| • | The electrolyte may come out when the mirror is broken. Do not allow it to contact your skin or eyes. If you accidentally get it in your eyes, flush with water and see your doctor |
| • | For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle |
6.3.2 Manual Type (if
equipped)
You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or
pulling its
adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to other
vehicles behind you
When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at
night,
adjust the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and
pushing or pulling it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear view.
6.4 Storage Compartments
6.4.1 Luggage Compartment
Luggage compartment is provided in the vehicle.
It is using for keeping bigger/large objects
Avoid the Maximum load of the Luggage.
Do not store too many items in the luggage compartment.
When you put the luggage, make sure that the luggage is
placed
firmly enough to avoid being shaken while driving. A shaky
or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver or passenger. Besides, ensure that the
luggage
does not obstruct the field
of the rearview
6.4.2 Front Storage
The front storage is located under the front centre panel. You
can use
it for small items.
Be cautious of items falling or interrupting the control of
the
gear selector lever
6.4.3 Sun Glass Holder
Roof mounted sun glass holder is an integral part of the front
interior lamp.
|
|
Press the lid to release the latch and lower the holder. It is
strategically positioned to be accessed easily by both the
driver and front passenger.
Do not access the sun
glass
holder while you are driving. It may distract your concentration and could lead to an
accident.
6.4.4 Glove Box
The glove box is located just below the Left side of Instrument
panel.
To open, gently pull the lever and lower the lid. To
close the glove box, raise the lid all the way up and gently press to lock the lid.
It is suggested to keep copies of all vehicle documents along
with the
Owner’s Manual Kit in the glove box for reference when
needed. There is also a pen holder inside the glove box for convenience.
To avoid the possibility
of
injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, glove box lids should be kept closed when
the
vehicle is in motion.
6.4.5 Centre Storage
The centre storage is mounted upon the glove box.
A cold/hot beverage placed in the storage may be thrown out
or
cause a burn. Use the cup holder for beverages.
6.4.6 Console Storage (If
equipped)
You can use the console storage by lifting up the console lid
with the
knob.
To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the
storage
compartment.
Do not store items that are damageable or cause noises since
they
can move around in the compartment while driving.
Do not store any flammable materials such as cigarette
lighter in
the console box or other space. In hot weather, they may
explode and cause a fire.
|
|
By pressing up the console knob, you can use the compartment in
the
console storage.
The console storage can be used as an armrest for both the
driver and
the passenger.
You can store a max. 10-inch mobile device (Galaxy tab, iPad,
etc.) in
the centre console storage.
6.4.7 Front Cup Holder/Rear
Cup
Holder and Armrest (if equipped)
Front Cup Holder:
|
The cup holder located in the floor console
between the
front seats, It can be used for small cups or cans that are closed
or have a lid.
|
Rear cup holder and armrest
(if
equipped)
|
|
The cup holders are located on both the left and
right
side trims.
|
Only sealed cups/cans
with lid
to be used in the cup holders.
Use caution when using
the cup
holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure driver or passengers. Spilled
liquids
can also damage interior trim and electrical components. Any spilled beverage can also
startle
the driver and cause a loss
of control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.
6.4.8 Bottle Holder
Bottle holders are located on both the front door lower trims.
You can
use them to store maps, papers, small books, bottles,
etc.
Only sealed/closed bottles are to be used in the bottle
holders.
6.5 Sun Visor
6.5.1 Sun Visor and Ticket
Holder
Sun Visor
Use the sun visor to shield the direct sunlight through the
front or
side windows.
To shield the sunlight through the windshield, pull it downward.
To shield the sunlight through the side window, pull it
downward,
unsnap it from the bracket and swing it to the side.
Ticket Holder
Tickets and cards can be stored.
| • | Adjusting the sun visor or using the mirror or ticket holder on the sun visor while driving may cause an accident by taking your attention away or blocking your view |
| • | Adjust and use the sun visor when the vehicle is not in move |
6.6 Centre Switch Cluster
|
Sl. No.
|
Switches
|
|---|---|
|
A
|
Tailgate and outside rearview mirror heated
glass
switch
|
|
B
|
PAB OFF indicator*
|
|
C
|
Rear seat belt indicator*
|
|
D
|
Hazard warning flasher switch
|
|
E
|
TRIP/RESET switch (LCD display switch)
|
|
F
|
Steering Mode Control switch
|
|
* - if equipped
|
|
| • | When rear passenger buckles to seat belt, then indication will go OFF, otherwise it will be blink for 33 seconds |
| • | When PAB switch in ON position, then Passenger airbag De- activation status will be OFF |
6.7 Microphone
|
The microphone is located on the roof above driver
side.
The microphone is used when talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to can be heard from the
front
speakers.
|
To use the hands-free system, you must pair your Bluetooth®
phone in
the system.
6.8 Power Outlet (12V)
The 12V power supply socket is provided for power take OFF.
Electrical
equipment/appliances like mobile phone charger, cigarette
lighter, etc. can be used in the outlets.
The power outlet are located in the compartment below the centre
bezel
switch bank.
The power sockets function
only
when the ignition is in ACC or ON positions. It is recommended to use the power sockets when
the ignition is ON to avoid battery drain.
To avoid serious
injury:
| • | Close the power outlet cap when not in use |
| • | Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet |
| • | When using electrical appliances, strictly follow the manufacturer's instruction manual |
| • | Never use the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping |
| • | Never insert foreign objects into the power outlet |
| • | Never use malfunctioning electrical appliances |
| • | Never insert inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet |
Do not modify, disassemble
or
repair the power outlet in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunction or fire,
which
could cause serious damage to equipment and/or personal injuries. Contact an Authorised
Mahindra
Dealer for any necessary
repairs.
To prevent injuries and
accidents,
secure all electrical appliances before use. Do not use any appliance that may:
| • | Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving |
| • | Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating |
| • | Emit steam, while the windows of the passenger compartment are closed |
| • | Remove the plug from the power outlet after using the electric device. Leaving the electric device plugged in for more time may cause the battery to drain |
| • | Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12V |
| • | Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and may interfere with other electronic systems or devices in your vehicle |
6.9 AUX and USB Ports
The AUX and USB ports are provided on the centre switch bezel below
the
infotainment control.
AUX (A) / USB (B) can be used as an input to the music system. You
can
connect iPods, USB memory sticks, etc. as an input
and listen to the music through the vehicle speakers.
USB (C) can be used only for charging.
USB (C) can be used only for charging.
|
A: AUX Jack
B: RH USB Port
C: LH Charging USB Ports (if equipped)
|
It is recommended to connect
an
input device only when the vehicle is stationary. Trying to connect an input device while
driving may distract your attention and lead to accidents.
6.10 Lamps
6.10.1 Interior Lamps
Interior lamps comprise front/rear roof lamps, ambience lamps
and
ignition key ring illumination. These lamps can be used
for an illuminated entry. In auto mode, the roof lamps (courtesy lamps) and ignition key ring
illuminate when any of the doors
are opened. Once all doors are closed, the interior lamps switch OFF.
Front Roof Lamp: The
front
roof lamps are located in the roof console above the interior rearview mirror.
The roof lamp can be switched ON pressing the ON switch A &
C.
Press the switch again to switch OFF the roof lamp. Also the
lamp goes off once the Lock button in RKE/PKE is pressed and the same will be ON again when it
is
un-lock button in RKE/PKE
is pressed
For Auto mode - Auto Mode switch (B) is in pressed condition the
roof
lamp will be ON when any of the doors are opened.
And the lamp will go off once the doors are closed.
|
A : Spot Lamp Switch (Passenger’s)
B : Main Room Lamp Switch (Auto Mode)
C : Spot Lamp Switch (Driver’s)
D: Sunroof Switch
|
Centre Room Lamp: The
centre room lamp comes on when pressing in this switch.
It goes out when pressing in the switch again. However, if the
main
room lamp switch is in Auto/door position, this lamp comes
on/goes off when opening/closing a door.
It can not be switched off independently in auto mode
Glove Box Lamp (if
equipped)
This lamp is located inside the Glove box.
It will get switched ON when Glove box is opened and switch OFF
when
it is closed only if parking lamp is ON condition.
6.10.2 Exterior Lamps
Lighting Control Stalk:
The
lighting control stalk is located on the right-hand side of the steering wheel and is a part of
the
combination switch.
It controls operations of parking lamps, head lamps, head lamp
beam
selection, high beam flashing, front/rear fog lamps and
turn signals when the ignition switch is ON.
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk
clockwise
aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to Position “OFF”
to switch OFF all lamps.
i) Turn Signals
A: Turn Signal - Left xxxxx B: Turn Signal -
Right
Taking a Right Turn:
| • | Push the lighting control stalk clockwise to indicate a right turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the right flashes along with the right side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards right |
After you have completed your right turn, the stalk will
automatically
return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator
lamp.
Taking a Left Turn :
| • | Push the lighting control stalk anti-clockwise to indicate a left turn. The instrument cluster arrow lamp pointing towards the left flashes along with the left side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards left |
| • | After you have completed your left turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp. |
If the turn signal lamps
on the
instrument panel flash faster than normal, there may be a possibility that one or more of
the turn signal lamp bulbs have blown. Replace the blown bulb immediately.
Changing Lanes:
The system is equipped with One Touch Lane Indicator function
which
can be used to signal a lane change
To signal a lane change, move the light control stalk clockwise
or
anti-clockwise to the limit point of free movement of the
lever and release. The turn signals will flash three times and stop.
The turn signals will continue flashing as long as the lighting
control stalk is held in the limit point of free movement.
ii) Parking Lamp ON
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk
clockwise/downward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk 2nd position
from the top position to switch ON the parking lamps.
The tail lamp, license
plate
lamp, instrument panel illumination lamps and all interior switches are also activated
when the
parking lamp is switched ON.
The Park lamps will be
switched
OFF automatically after opening the driver door. If a user still wants a park lamp they
must
turn OFF & turn ON manually.
Park Lamp Warning
Buzzer
A warning buzzer sound will be provided if the park lamp is left
ON
with ignition OFF, as soon as driver door is opened.
iii) Head Lamp “AUTO”
Function
Auto head lamp switches ON the head lamp based on the outside
ambient
light sensed by the RLS sensor. This is useful when
travelling through tunnels or low light areas.
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk
clockwise/upward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to the 3rd
position from top to switch ON Auto head lamp function
| • | Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax |
| • | On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending on the weather, season, or circumstances |
| • | Any aftermarket sunfilm or spray may cause the lighting system to malfunction |
| • | When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phenomenon recognising the automatic setting |
| • | There may be a difference between ambient light intensity sensed by the RLS sensor and the human eye. Hence it is possible that during low light conditions, the head lamp is activated early as the RLS sensor senses it as low intensity. This is a normal behaviour. |
iv) Head Lamp ON
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk
clockwise
aligning the “arrow” on 1st position from the top to
switch ON the head lamps.
v) Head Lamp Low/High
Beam
Switch ON the head lamp, and push the lighting control stalk
down
(away) from steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp high
beam & lift/pull the lighting control stalk up again towards the steering wheel to switch ON
the
head lamp low beam. In head
lamp high beam, the high beam tell-tale lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates indicating
high
beam option selected.
|
A
|
Low Beam
|
B
|
High Beam
|
Your vehicle head
lamps
are vented and moisture may be collected on the inside of the head lamp lens under
certain
climatic
and geographical conditions. This moisture will evaporate once the head lamps have
been
switched ON for a few minutes.
vi) Head Lamp Flash
Pull the lighting control stalk towards the steering wheel to
instantaneously flash the head lamp high beam and Low beam.
Head Lamp Levelling
System
When the vehicle is either fully or partially loaded, it may
have an
upward inclination disturbing the head lamp aiming. A
correct head lamp setting provides good visibility to the driver with minimum inconvenience to
other
road users.
|
To properly aim the head lamp beam, use the head
lamp
levelling switch. This switch is located on the right side of the steering
column shroud in the instrument panel. This switch has four positions marked as
0, 1, 2
& 3.
|
|
Switch
Position
|
Vehicle
Loading Condition
|
|---|---|
|
0
|
Driver/Driver with Front Passenger
|
|
1
|
Driver + Front passenger + Second row
occupied
|
|
2
|
All seats occupied
|
|
3
|
All seats occupied with luggage OR
Driver with
luggage at extreme rear side
|
Select the suitable switch position depending on the pay loading
condition as advised in the table.
The headlights can only
be
adjusted when the low beam is switched ON.
6.10.3 Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) /
Rear Park Lamp (if equipped)
To enable DRL/Rear Park
Lamp: In daytime whenever the vehicle is in running and park lamp switch is in OFF
position,
DRL / Rear Park Lamp is enabled.
To disable DRL:
Whenever
the vehicle is in running and park lamp is ON, DRL will get switch to park mode
If customer doesn’t want the DRL/Rear Park Lamp to be ON, he
can
disable through infotainment settings.
6.10.4 Fog Lamps (If
equipped)
Fog lamps (if equipped) are to be used along with head lamp low
beam,
to improve the vision during foggy and misty conditions.
Front Fog Lamps ON
To switch ON the front fog lamps, first switch ON the parking
lamps,
rotate the inner rotary switch on the lighting control
stalk clockwise aligning the front fog lamp icon to the “arrow” on the inner fixed stalk as
shown.
The front fog lamp indicator in the instrument cluster indicates
the
operation status.
Fog lamps will turn ON
only if
parking lamp is ON due to Park light input or Auto light input.
Fog Lamps OFF
Align the “marking” of inner rotary switch on the lighting
control
stalk to the “OFF” position on the inner fixed stalk as
shown to switch OFF the fog lamps.
6.10.5 Rear Defogging
There are heating grids on the tailgate glass. Be careful not to
damage the heating grids while cleaning inside of the tailgate
window.
Do not coat the tailgate window with commercial anti-glare
film.
When the metal anti-glare film and two-tone anti-glare film
is used, the sensitivity of the heating grids can be deteriorated.
If any transmitter or receiver is close to the antenna, it
can
interfere with the communication of the antenna.
The heating element of the glass is activated only when the
ignition is ON. When the glass heater switch is pressed, the heating
elements of the rear windshield and outside rearview mirrors are turned on simultaneously.
6.11 Hazard Warning Lamp
The hazard warning lamp switch is in the center bezel switch bank
on the
instrument panel.
Press this switch to turn ON the Hazard Warning Lamp. All the Turn
Signal
Lamps will start flashing. The instrument cluster
turn indicator lamps also flash indicating the same. To turn OFF, push the switch again.
Use the hazard warning lamp when your vehicle is stationary or to
warn
other road users to be cautious while passing your
vehicle.
The turn lamps will work
when the
hazard warning lamps are operational.
6.12 Auto Hazard Warning Lamp
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically during bonnet open in
vehicle
stationary condition.
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically for 10 seconds during
panic
braking condition to indicate oncoming traffic.
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate
event
of an accident where Airbags are deployed. In such
a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 minutes or it can be turned off by operating Hazard
switch
(OFF to ON) or Ignition
reset (Ignition OFF and ON)
6.13 Follow-Me Home (FMH) with
Rain
Light Sensor (RLS) (If equipped)
This feature helps the driver and passengers to easily get out of
the
vehicle during poor light conditions. The head lamp
low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds, assisting the passengers to find their way unless
cancelled
by the UNLOCK signal
from the RKE.
To enable FMH;
| • | Ignition transition from ON to OFF |
| • | Park lamp is OFF |
| • | Ignition key is out |
| • | Driver door open within 3 mins from KEY OUT |
| • | Head lamp would turn ON only if the ambience light is found dark by the light sensor |
To extend FMH;
| • | The first RKE/PKE LOCK command will be used for locking all doors |
| • | Successive RKE/PKE LOCK commands will be used for toggling the current status of the head lamp low beam |
| • | Each time FMH is extended the head lamp low beam will be kept/turned on for the next 20 seconds |
To disable FMH
| • | Park lamp transition from OFF to ON |
| • | Ignition off to any other state |
| • | FMH ON 20 seconds expires |
| • | FMH Max time is 3 minutes expires |
With FMH mode ON, if the UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE;
the
feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further.
Also, the doors are unlocked.
6.14 Lead Me to Vehicle Lamp(LMV)
(if
equipped)
LMV is the feature that will switch ON the head lamp for 20 secs.
helping
the passengers to reach the parked vehicle safely
and comfortably at night.
LMV is activated:
| • | Pressing the unlock button on the RKE two times |
LMV is de-activated:
| • | Switch ON the parking lamps |
| • | Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position |
| • | Press the RKE lock/unlock button once |
| • | Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF automatically |
To extend the LMV feature further for 20 secs., press RKE UNLOCK
button
once. This LMV extension can be availed for maximum
3 minutes from the first activation.
With LMV mode ON; First UNLOCK signal received from RKE will unlock
the
doors and subsequent UNLOCK signal is used to toggle
the head lamp ON and OFF.
6.15 Windshield Wipers
6.15.1 Wiper Control Stalk
|
A: Flick- Wipe (MIST)
B: Off
C: Intermittent (INT)/AUTO
D: Low Speed (LO)
E: High Speed (HI)
F: Rotary Switch
|
Wiper Off: The wipe
function is OFF when the wiper control stalk is in neutral position (B).
Flick-Wipe (Mist):
Push the
wipe control stalk to position (A) for a flick-wipe, hold to operate the wipe continuously
(simultaneously lift the
wiper stalk towards the steering wheel to operate the wash). The stalk automatically comes back
to
position (B) when released.
Intermittent (INT) (If
equipped):Intermittent (INT) mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is
pushed
down to position (C). In the INT mode, the
wiper operates on preset intervals. The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the
wiper
speed intensity rotary
switch (F).
Auto Mode (if
equipped):
Auto mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position C. In the
AUTO
mode, the wiper operates
based on rain intensity.
The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper
speed
intensity rotary switch (F).
When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will
automatically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from
the “OFF” to the “AUTO” position.
Low Speed Wiping:
Push the
wipe control stalk down to the position (D) to operate the wiper at a fixed low speed.
High Speed Wiping:
Push the
wiper control stalk down to position (E) to operate the wiper at a fixed high speed.
6.15.2 Wipe/Wash
Pull/Lift the wiper control stalk towards the steering wheel
from any
position to activate wipe/wash function. Washer fluid
from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield. The wipers wipe the
windshield
3 times after the washer
spray is stopped. Hold the stalk in position for continuous spray of washer fluid.
When wiper is in OFF or
Intermittent mode:
After completion of the
wipe/wash cycle, wipers return to their bottom position.
If the wipers are in
Intermittent mode and DWELL delay is less than or equal to 5 secs., then the wiper will
continue
in the
Intermittent mode.
If the wipers are in
Intermittent mode, and DWELL delay is more than 5 secs., then a further single wipe will
be
performed
5 secs. after the wash/wipe cycle. After the drip wipe (last wipe), wiper returns to
normal
Intermittent wipe.
The wipe/wash function
can be
activated only when the ignition is in “ON” position.
6.15.3 AUTO Wash (if
equipped)
When Auto Washer switch is pressed once, Washer fluid from front
washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield
for 2 seconds. The wipers wipe the windshield 4 times
After that, again Washer fluid from front washer motor will turn
ON
for 1.5 seconds and the wipers wipe the windshield 3 times
AUTO wash function will
work
only when the wiper switch is in OFF mode.
6.15.4 Rear Wiper-INT Mode
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to
align the
“arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position
to operate the rear wiper in INT mode. In this mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals of 4
seconds.
6.15.5 Rear Wiper-ON Mode
Rotate the outer rotary switch on the wiper control stalk to
align the
“arrow” on the stalk to the rear wipe “ON” position
to operate the rear wiper continuously .
6.15.6 Rear Wash
Push the wiper control stalk towards back side from any position
to
activate wipe/wash function. The rear windshield wash
& wipe operates 3 to 4 times or as long as the stalk end is Push/Pull to the rear wash
position.
Wiping will continue for
3 times after releasing the stalk end switch.
If you switch OFF the
ignition
before switching OFF the wiper, the blades stop at random on the windshield. Switch ON the
ignition and move wiper stalk to 'MIST' position to return the wipers to the park
position,
provided the wiper stalk is in
OFF position.
Using a windshield washer
in
freezing temperatures could be dangerous. The washer fluid could freeze on the windshield,
and
block your vision resulting in an accident. If you operate your vehicle in temperatures
below 40
deg C, use washer fluid with
anti-freeze protection.
| • | Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. It may lead to scratches on the glass |
| • | It is recommended not to use the wiper when the windshield glass is covered with debris, snow or leaves. Clean the glass before using the wiper to avoid damage to the wiper blades and glass |
| • | Do not operate the windshield washer for more than 10 secs. or when the reservoir is empty |
6.15.7 Windshield Washer Jet
-
Front & Rear
There are two nozzles with triple adjustable washer jets in the
front
(on the bonnet). Using a pin, the eye ball jets can
be adjusted precisely for direction. Always direct the washer jet to hit the middle of the
windshield.
This will enable the
wiper blade to wipe the complete width of the windshield.
In the rear, one nozzle with triple adjustable washer jets are
provided for the rear windshield wash. Adjust the nozzle to
direct the washer jet to hit the middle of rear windshield using a pin. Rear windshield washer
fluid
is supplied from front
washer reservoir located in the motor compartment.
7 CONVENIENCE SYSTEMS II
7.1 Sunroof (if equipped)
A sunroof will make the driving experience more enjoyable by
bringing
more day light into the vehicle.
It enhances the fun of driving, with fresh air, It provides a more
relaxed driving experience.
A sunroof allows air to flow evenly from above the driver, which is
much
quieter and less intrusive than wind blowing through
a side window
Sunroof Switch: The
sunroof
cover opens and closes manually.
| • | Operate the sunroof only when it is required. Operating repeatedly will run down the battery |
| • | Even though the sunroof can be operated when the ignition key is in the ON position (the engine is not running), operating the sunroof repeatedly with the engine turned off will run down the battery. Operate the sunroof while the engine is running |
| • | When a desired sunroof operation is completed, release the switch. If you keep pressing the switch, it could cause a malfunction. Especially in winter, never operate the sunroof if moving areas are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced |
| • | When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely close the sunroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle theft. Or, the interior of the vehicle will be wet when it rains or snows |
| • | When the sunroof is slid to its complete open position, the wind buffet phenomenon can increase. If this happens, adjust by opening the sunroof or only open two-thirds of the sunroof by using only the first step of the opening system |
| • | When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped |
| • | Clean up the circumference of sunroof regularly. Otherwise, operating the sunroof may cause a noise due to foreign material and dirt |
| • | Opening the sunroof or driving with the sunroof open after a car wash or rain may lead to water entering |
| • | Close the sunroof while driving in the dusty environment. The dusts or particles entered can cause operating problems |
| • | If a roof rack system is installed on the vehicle roof or any cargo is secured to the roof rack, do not operate the sunroof. If you are required to operate the sunroof, carefully check that the roof rack system does not interfere with the sunroof and it is safe to open the sunroof |
| • | Make sure that no passenger sticks out head, hand or any part of his/her body out of the sunroof opening while driving. There is a risk of personal injury when the vehicle is stopped suddenly |
| • | Before operating the sunroof, make sure that no head, hand, finger, or any object is capable of being trapped. There is a risk of personal injury or even death |
7.1.1 Sunroof Sliding
Operation
Open: 2-Step Opening
|
|
Push up the switch, hold for more than 1 sec and then release it
:
2-step auto sliding open.
Step 1 (First Stage):
Push
the switch up, hold for more than 1 sec and then release it, the sunroof is automatically opened
by
two-third
of its travel.
Step 2 (Second
Stage): Push
the switch up, hold for more than 1 sec and then release it again, the sunroof is completely
opened.
If the switch is pushed momentarily or less than 1 second and
released, the sunroof will open in manual mode and switch has
to be pressed continuously for full open or up till any other desired location
Close
|
|
Pull down the switch, hold for more than 1 sec and then release
it :
auto sliding close.
Pull the switch down, hold for more than 1 sec and then release
it,
the sunroof is automatically closed to full close condition.
If the switch is pulled momentarily or less than 1 second and
released, the sunroof will close in manual mode and switch has
to be pulled down continuously for full close or up till any other desired location.
To stop the sunroof, pull or push the switch at desired position
while
moving.
7.1.2 Sunroof Tilting
Operation
Tilt UP: The rear
side of
the sunroof is tilted up when pulling down the sunroof switch with the sunroof closed.
Tilt DOWN: The rear
side of
the sunroof is tilted down when pushing up the sunroof switch with the sunroof tilted up.
Anti-Pinch Function (if
equipped)
|
To prevent any body parts from being trapped by
the
sliding sunroof, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens the sunroof
when an object is trapped.
|
| • | This safety function is available for the auto sliding sunroof close |
| • | The anti-Pinch function is deactivated just before the sunroof closes |
| • | Sunroof safety function is supplemental and not always operable depending on circumstances (e.g. any electrical device in the vehicle, etc.), therefore, the driver should check safety at all times before operating the sunroof |
When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions
before
operation. Parts of the body can be trapped.
Do not stick out any part of your body out of the sunroof
even in
stationary.
Improper use of the power
sunroof can result in serious personal injury.
| • | Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle – particularly if they have access to the vehicle key. Unsupervised use of the remote control vehicle key makes it possible to lock the vehicle, turn on the ignition, start the vehicle and operate the sunroof |
| • | Never stand or sit on sunroof glasses or roof. This can cause severe damage and would be treated as abuse of the sunroof which not covered by warranty |
| • | Never keep the Luggages / weights on top of the roof/sunroof |
| • | Any wet area found on the headliner shall be reported an Authorised Mahindra Dealer Immediately |
| • | Never close the sunshade during the sunroof glass is in open condition. This can cause the sunshade damage and would be treated as abuse of the sunroof which not covered by warranty |
| • | Without pinch protection, the power Sunroof will close with enough force to cause serious personal injury |
| • | Always be careful when closing the power Sunroof |
| • | Pinch protection cannot prevent fingers or other parts of the body from being pressed against the edge of the roof; may result in injuries |
| • | If the power Sunroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. Visit a Mahindra Authorized Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility for assistance |
Wind Buffeting: When
you
drive this vehicle with the window or sunroof open at a certain position, you may feel some
pressure
upon your ears
or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. This happens because of an influx in air
through the window or sunroof
and its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by opening the window or sunroof.
Battery Discharge or Power
Failure
while Operating Sunroof
If the sunroof is stopped midway due to a discharged battery or
power
failure or low SOC, you need to re-calibrate the starting
point of the sunroof. In addition, the following cases need the recalibration.
| • | The sunroof does not completely close or open by operating the switch once |
| • | The sunroof slides back to close. But the operation does not stop even after a complete close and tilts up the sunroof |
| • | The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding open or tilt up |
| • | The sunroof does not work |
| • | Operation of the sunroof switch does not do anything or work properly. |
| • | The operating process is not same as before due to discharged or disconnected battery. |
|
Initialization and
Self Learning Procedure
|
||
|
|
|
Condition for
Re-Initialization
& Self-Learning Procedure:
| • | After the fitment of Sunroof onto the vehicle body ,it must be Re-initialized. |
| • | Whenever the sunroof motor is removed and refitted or replaced without sunroof removal from vehicle. |
| • | Whenever the sunroof glass assembly is removed and refitted or replaced without sunroof removal from vehicle. |
Initializing
Procedure
To initialize the sliding sunroof, use the following procedure.
Step 1: Turn ON the ignition.
Step 2: Sunroof to be in TILT position. Pull down the ‘sunroof
operating switch’ and hold it for more than 10 seconds and
release it. During this process, Sunroof tilts slightly upwards and return to its tilt
position.
A jerky glass movement is
observed this indicates the completion of INITIALIZATION.
After INITIALIZATION process is completed, a SELF LEARNING
PROCESS
needs to be executed within 4 seconds.
Self-Learning Procedure
| • | Sunroof shall be in TILT position after initialization (Ignition on). |
| • | Pull down the ‘sunroof operating switch’ and hold it continuously. Do not release the switch till the sunroof completes the below actions automatically (Sunroof will start its cycle within 5 seconds). |
| • | Glass movement from Tilt - Close - Open - Close. (Cycle time 14- 20 seconds). |
Self-learning command is completed with the above cycle.
| 1. | If the initialization procedure is not completely performed, then it must be run again from step 2. |
| 2. | Self-learning procedure can be done only after the Initialization procedure. |
| 3. | Self-learning procedure needs to start within 4 sec after Initialization, if not started within 4 seconds, then initialization procedure to be performed again. |
| 4. | If the switch is released in-between the self-learning procedure, then initialization procedure to be performed again. |
| 5. | Incase tilt function is not happening as per step 2, then sunroof needs resetting (Refer Reset & Initialization Procedure). |
Reset & Initialization
Procedure
To Reset & Initialization the sunroof, use the following
procedure.
Step 1: The sunroof to be in fully open condition.
Step 2: Push up the sunroof operating switch and hold for more
than 10
seconds and then release for reset.
Step 3: Pull down and hold the switch to complete the cycle:
Glass
movement from open (Glass moves from open to close in 10-12
steps) – Tilt up – Tilt upwards slightly – Tilt Position.
Step 4: A jerky glass movement is observed. This indicates the
completion of the initialization procedure. Overall, approx.
20 to 22 seconds.
Continue the self-learning procedure within less than 4 seconds.
If the reset procedure is not completely performed, then the
complete procedure should be started again from step 1. (If the
glass is not closing in steps, the intended reset procedure is not getting followed).
| • | To help prevent damage, remove ice and snow from the sunroof before opening or tilting it in winter season |
| • | Always close the Sunroof before leaving the vehicle or if it begins to rain. If the Sunroof is open or tilted, rain could enter the vehicle interior and cause extensive damage to the electrical system. This could result in further vehicle damage. |
| • | Remove leaves and other objects from the Sunroof guiderails regularly either by hand or using a vacuum cleaner. |
| • | If the power Sunroof malfunctions, pinch protection may not function properly. See a Mahindra Authorized Dealer or an authorized Mahindra Service Facility |
| • | During sliding sunroof (auto/manual) open operation, the sunshade will also open in synchronization with sliding sunroof glass. |
| • | During sliding sunroof (auto/manual) close operation, the sunshade will not close in synchronization with sliding sunroof glass. |
Do not remove vehicle battery while sunroof is in motion
7.1.3 Sunroof Service
Checking
Procedure
| • | Open the Sunroof |
| • | Check all 4 Rail channel corners for mud or Dust/Leaf present in it |
| • | Move the leafs/Dust to centre of rain channel and then remove it by hand |
Do not blow air in drain hose channel before cleaning it
manually –
as the bigger leaves may go inside and block drain hose.
| • | After cleaning of all visible particles, blow air into drain hose channel area to clean hose for mud in this area |
| • | Now pour 1 litre of water in rain channel and check if water is draining or not |
If water is not draining kindly contact the Authorised
Mahindra
Dealer or Authorised Mahindra Service Centre.
High Pressure washer nozzle jets should not be directed
towards
Sunroof seals.
Do not use High pressure water on Sunroof area.
It is recommended to wipe the seals with damp micro-fiber
cloth
during cleaning.
Sunroof rails and drain area should be cleaned using air
blower.
7.2 Heating, Ventilation And
Air-Conditioning System (HVAC)
HVAC system
provided in
the vehicle enables occupants to automatically/manually adjust air flow distribution pattern, air
flow rate, air intake mode and air temperature inside passenger compartment. By appropriately
adjusting
the control knobs/switches
provided on the HVAC control panel, located on centre console, occupant’s comfort can be ensured.
HVAC
system also helps in
defrosting and defogging / de-misting the windshield and windows.
Air flow
direction can
be further controlled by adjusting louvres of air vents. An air filter is provided at the inlet of
HVAC blower.
Engine coolant is
utilised to heat the cabin air. For cooling the cabin air, an air-condititioning circuit based on
the
vapour
compression refrigeration cycle is used. The air-condititioning system uses a refrigerant along
with a
suitable lubricating
oil. Although being non-ozone depleting, the refrigerant is a greenhouse gas, hence once allowed to
escape in the atmosphere,
it adversely affects the environment by contributing to global warming/climate change.
Refrigerant used in system is a hazardous liquefied gas and is
under
high pressure. The refrigerant is colourless and has
ethereal or faint sweetish odour. Exposure of refrigerant to skin or eyes may cause
irritation and
frostbite. They can also
cause suffocation, dizziness and loss of concentration. When mixed with compressed air or
certain
other refrigerants, it may
form flammable mixture. Never try to service HVAC system yourself which would involve
refrigerant
handling.
- If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater
with all
the windows closed, You may suffocate to death due to
lack of ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater, ventilate frequently.
Multiple vents
are
provided for distributing the air, being force-circulated by HVAC blower, throughout the passenger
compartment.
To ensure sufficient air flow and hence adequate HVAC system
performance, air flow path should be kept free of obstructions.
Keep system’s air intake, located near plenum appliqué, free of snow, leaves and other
debris. Also
keep the area in front
of air vents free of any obstruction inside the cabin.
7.2.1 Air Vents
|
Front Centre Vent :
You
can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving the knob horizontally or vertically.
Front Side Vent: You
can
adjust the direction of the airflow by moving the airflow direction control lever on the air
outlet.
The outlet vents can be opened or closed using the vent dial.
7.2.2 Dual Automatic
Temperature
Control (DATC) (if equipped)
|
Auto Operation Mode (Auto
Indicator ON)
 |
1. AUTO Switch
2. Temperature control Switch
3. Auto Indicator ON
|
Use only when the engine is running.
| 1. | Press the AUTO (1) switch. |
| 2. | AUTO indicator is displayed on the display. |
| 3. | Set the desired cabin temperature with the temperature control switch (2). |
| 4. | The temperature of the passenger compartment is automatically maintained according to the set temperature. |
| 5. | If the driver and co-driver require different temperatures in their respective zones, the same can be done by pressing the dual switch and subsequently, setting different temperatures using temperature control switches. |
When you use the blower speed control knob, mode switch (air
source
selection switch), air conditioner switch or defroster
switch during the auto operation mode, AUTO indicator
on
the display goes out and the air conditioner system can be controlled manually.
Manual Operation Mode (Auto
Indicator OFF)
|
1
|
ON/OFF switch
|
5
|
Air Source Selection Switch
|
|
2
|
Temperature control switch
|
6
|
A/C ON Switch
|
|
3
|
Blower Speed Control knob
|
7
|
AUTO Indicator OFF
|
|
4
|
Air Distribution/Mode Switch
|
Use only when the engine is running.
| 1. | Press ON/OFF switch (1) |
| 2. | Set the desired temperature by pressing the temperature control switch (2). |
| 3. | Adjust the blower speed by rotating the blower speed control knob (3). |
| 4. | Select the air flow by pressing the air distribution/mode switch (4). |
| 5. | Select the air source mode by pressing air source selection switch (5). |
| 6. | To turn on the air conditioner, press the A/C ON switch (6). |
In manual mode, the AUTO indicator on display does not come on
and you
can manually adjust the climate conditions by controlling
the switches such as temperature, blower speed, mode (air distribution), A/C, air source
selection,
MEMORY and DUAL temp.
selection control switches.
To activate the auto operation mode, press AUTO switch.
Blower speed control knob
(2)
You can adjust the airflow by rotating the blower speed knob (2)
with
engine ON. If you adjust the airflow using blower speed
control knob (2) in AUTO mode, the AUTO indicator (B) on display (1) goes off and the operation
mode
is changed to the manual
mode.
The air conditioner does not operate with rotating the blower
speed
knob, if the A/C switch is not pressed. However, the air
flows due to the blower operation.
AUTO switch (3)
If you press the AUTO switch (3) with engine ON, AUTO indicator
(B)
appears on display (1) and the set temperature is maintained
while the airflow and air distribution are automatically controlled.
The indicator lamp (L) lights up while AUTO switch (3) is
operating,
and the lamp (L) turns off when the AUTO switch is not
working.
Front defogger switch
(4)
Use this switch for quick defogging with the engine ON.
When you press this switch, its indicator lamp lights up, and the airflow direction is changed to the windshield and door glasses while outside air comes in with A/C operation.
The temperature of the air is automatically changed to Hot when the front defogger switch is pressed. However, the user can reduce the temperature by pressing the temperature down button as per wish.
At this time A/C, front defogger and Fresh air indicators come on in the display. If you press the switch again, defogging stops with the indicator lamp turned off and the mode returns to the previous operation. While the front defogger switch (4) is operating, its indicator lamp (L) lights up and the lamp (L) turns off when the front defogger switch is not working. DUAL mode will not function in front defogger mode.
When you press this switch, its indicator lamp lights up, and the airflow direction is changed to the windshield and door glasses while outside air comes in with A/C operation.
The temperature of the air is automatically changed to Hot when the front defogger switch is pressed. However, the user can reduce the temperature by pressing the temperature down button as per wish.
At this time A/C, front defogger and Fresh air indicators come on in the display. If you press the switch again, defogging stops with the indicator lamp turned off and the mode returns to the previous operation. While the front defogger switch (4) is operating, its indicator lamp (L) lights up and the lamp (L) turns off when the front defogger switch is not working. DUAL mode will not function in front defogger mode.
|
MEMORY
switch (5)
As a convenience function, pressing this
switch, automatically change the current climate conditions to
previously
saved temperature,
blower speed, air source selection and mode while the engine is ON.
With MEMORY function, you can save
maximum 3
modes which appear on display (w/ saved memory indicator) in sequence,
each
time
MEMORY switch is briefly pressed.
|
|||||||
|
Examples
of items that can be memorised are:
|
|||||||
|
MEMORY
|
Memory
item
|
||||||
|
Driver
side Temp.
|
Passenger
side Temp.
|
A/C
|
Air
Distribution
|
Air
Source
Selection
|
Blower
Speed
|
Dual
|
|
|
1
|
22 deg C
|
22 deg C
|
OFF
|
Face and foot mode
|
Fresh Air
|
Level 2
|
OFF
|
|
2
|
25 deg C
|
23 deg C
|
OFF
|
Face mode
|
Recirculation
|
Level 4
|
ON
|
|
3
|
30 deg C
|
28 deg C
|
OFF
|
Foot mode
|
Fresh Air
|
Level 8
|
ON
|
|
MEMORY function will stop if you press any
control
switch other than MEMORY switch (5) during its operation.
|
|||||||
How to use MEMORY
function
| 1. | Select the desired memory (1M, 2M or 3M), which needs to be set. |
| 2. | Adjust the temp, Dual mode, mode, Auto etc what is desired. |
| 3. | Press and hold the MEMORY switch for 3-4 seconds. |
| 4. | 1M/2M OR 3M selected in display blinks for 5 times, stating the setting are getting saved. |
| 5. | Once settings are saved, the blinking STOPS. |
| 6. | Similarly set other 2 memory also. |
| 7. | User can select the desired Memory, all setting changes as stored in that memory. |
If you adjust the
temperature, blower speed, Air source selection and mode from saved memory location
(1M,
2M, 3M), the memory
is replaced with new information, when you press and hold the memory switch for 3 -
4
seconds
ON/OFF switch (6)
You can turn on or turn off the Dual automatic Temperature
controller
(DATC) by using this switch with IGN ON.
The display (1) comes on or goes off by pressing ON/OFF switch
(6).
Co–Driver temperature
control
switch (7)
To adjust the co-driver side temperature as desired, press the
co-driver side temperature switch (7) while the engine is
ON. The temperature decreases with pressing blue ˅(arrow) and increases with red
˄(arrow).
The set temperature ( A ) is shown on the display after pressing
the
switch (7).
Air source selection switch
(8)
If you press this switch (8) with IGN ON, the indication lamp
(L)
lights up and the air recirculation indicator on display
(1) comes on. If you press this switch (8) again, the indication lamp (L) turns off and the air
source
selection is changed
to Fresh air intake mode.
Do not use recirculation mode in the vehicle for extended
periods
of time with every window closed. Doing so can cause headache,
drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen
If exhaust gas comes in, there is a danger of carbon monoxide
poisoning. Set to the fresh air intake mode after passing through
a dusty or polluted area with air recirculation mode.
Automatic selection of the
fresh
or air circulation mode
When the front defogger switch is pressed, outside air
automatically
comes in. When the switch is pressed again, the previous
mode is restored.
DUAL switch (9)
This function allows controlling the passenger side temperature
separately with engine ON.
| • | If you press the DUAL switch (9), the indicator lamp (L) lights up and DUAL mode indicator on the display comes on |
| • | When the driver temperature control switch (11) is pressed, the driver side temperature (I) on the display is adjusted as desired and co-driver temperature control switch (7) is pressed, passenger side temperature (A) on the display is adjusted as desired |
| • | While the DUAL mode switch (9) is operating, its indicator lamp (L) lights up and the lamp turns off when the DUAL mode switch is not working |
When the DUAL mode switch (9) is turned off with its
indicator (K),
the passenger temperature (A) returns to the driver side
set temperature (I).
Mode switch (10)
Each time you press this switch (10) with IGN ON, the air
distribution
mode is changed and displayed as shown in the figure
below.
When you press this switch in AUTO mode (AUTO indicator ON), the
system is changed to the manual control mode (AUTO indicator
OFF).
 |
Face Mode (normally, when cooling)
|
 |
Face & Foot Mode
|
 |
Foot Mode (normally, when heating)
Note:
When choosing this mode, some air flows out from windshield and
side
glass vents to prevent from fogging on the windshield.
|
 |
Foot and front defogger mode
|
Driver temperature control
switch
(11)
You can adjust the driver side temperature with this switch (11)
if
the DUAL switch (9) is turned ON while the engine is running.
The temperature decreases with pressing blue ˅(arrow) and increases with red
˄(arrow).
Refer to dual switch (9)
Air conditioner switch
(13)
Air conditioner is turned ON and OFF with this switch (13).
While air
conditioner switch (13) is operating, its indicator
lamp (L) lights up, and the lamp turns off when the switch is not working.
7.2.3 Electronic Temperature
Control (ETC) (if equipped)
|
Heater/Air conditioner
operation
Operate while the engine is running.
| • | Adjust the airflow by rotating the blower speed control knob(4). |
| • | Set the desired temperature by pressing the temperature control switch (2) |
| • | Adjust the air distribution with using the mode switch (8, 9,12,13) |
| • | Select the air intake mode by pressing air recirculation switch (7) or fresh air intake switch (11) |
| • | Press the air conditioner switch (5) to use A/C |
While each switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights up,
and the
lamp turns off when the switch is not working.
Switch indicator lamp
(1)
This lamp indicates temperature change by the temperature
control
switch (2) operation.
As you press ˅ button on the temperature control
switch
(2), the red LED (B) turns off one by one, and the blue LED (A) lights on in the
same way
As you press ˄ button on the temperature control
switch
(2), the blue LED (A) turns off one by one, and the red LED (B) lights on in the
same way.
Temperature control switch
(2)
By pressing this switch, you can adjust the temperature as
desired
Each time you press the ˄ button on temperature control
switch, the
temperature increases and the temperature decreases as ˅ button is pressed.
The blue (cold)/red(hot) LED in the switch indicator lamp (1)
will
come on or goes off depending on the temperature control
switch (2) operation.
While the red LEDs of the temperature indicator lamp (B) are
lighted on, they will turn off one by one each time you press
˅ button on the
temperature
control switch (2). Likewise, the blue LEDs will go off one by one as you press the
˄ button on the
temperature
control switch (2) while they came on the temperature indicator lamp (A).
Blower knob position
indicator
(3)
This indicator shows current position of the blower speed
control knob
(4).
Blower speed control knob
(4)
You can adjust the airflow by rotating the blower speed control
knob
(4) with IGN ON.
The blower speed decreases if you rotate the knob (4)
counterclockwise
(A) and it increases when you rotate the knob clockwise
(B). This will stop at OFF position of the knob (4).
Air conditioner switch
(5)
Rotate the blower speed control knob (4) clockwise (B ) from the
OFF
position while the engine is ON.
| 1. | Press the air conditioner switch (5). |
| 2. | Press the temperature control switch (2) to adjust for the cool air to come out. |
| 3. | Set the air distribution as desired by pressing the mode switch (8 , 9 , 12, 13). |
While each switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights up,
and the
lamp turns off when the switch is not working.
Do not use recirculation mode for extended periods of time.
Doing
so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due
to lack of oxygen.
The air conditioner does not operate with rotating the blower
speed
control knob (4), if the A/C switch (5) is not pressed.
However, the air flows 7 due to the blower operation.
Front defogger switch
(6)
Use this switch for quick defogging with the engine ON.
When you press this switch (6), its indicator lamp (C) lights
up, and
the airflow direction is changed to the windshield and
door glasses while outside air comes in with A/C operation.
To cancel the Front defogger function, press any switch among
the mode
switch (8, 9,12,13) and MAX A/C switch (10).
When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the
windshield
and windows. The fog will block your view through all
windows and can create a dangerous situation. If this happens, press the mode switch (12 ) to
change the airflow direction
toward the windshield with Foot and front defogger mode.
Air recirculation mode
switch
(7)
When you press this switch (7), air recirculation mode is
applied and
indicator lamp (7C) lights on.
Use this mode when maximum heating/air conditioning is needed.
To cancel the air recirculation mode, press the fresh air intake
mode
switch (11).
Do not use recirculation mode for extended periods of time.
Doing
so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due
to lack of oxygen.
If exhaust gas comes in, there is a danger of carbon monoxide
poisoning. Set to the fresh air intake mode after passing through
a dusty or polluted area with air recirculation mode.
MAX A/C switch (10)
When you press MAX A/C (Maximum cooling) switch (10) while the
heater
or A/C is running,
| • | The air conditioner operates |
| • | The air recirculation mode is applied |
| • | The air flows toward the face |
| • | The temperature is automatically set to the lowest with all blue LEDs (4EA) of the temperature indicator lamp (A) lighted up |
Fresh air intake mode switch
(11)
When you press this switch (11), fresh air intake mode is
applied and
indicator lamp (11C) lights on.
To cancel the fresh air intake mode, press the recirculation
mode
switch (7).
Airflow mode switch (6, 8,
9, 12,
13)
You can adjust the airflow distribution with using these
switches.
While each switch is operating, its indicator lamp lights up,
and the
lamp turns off when the switch is turned off.
 |
The air flows toward the windshield and
door
glasses. If you press the Front defogger switch, the fresh air intake
mode is
automatically applied and the air conditioner operates.
|
 |
Face Mode (when cooling)
|
 |
Face and foot mode
|
|
MAX
A/C
|
Face mode . The air recirculation mode
is
applied and the air conditioner operates.
The lowest temperature is automatically
selected with all blue LEDs lighted on (Maximum cooling position).
|
 |
Foot and front defogger mode
The fresh air intake mode is
automatically
applied.
|
 |
Foot mode (normally, when heating)
Note: While in Foot mode, some air flows to the
windshield and door glasses to prevent the windshield from fogging
|
7.2.4 Defogging/Defrosting
DATC - Front defogging
operation
| • | Press the front defogger switch (1). (The indicator lamp (C) ON) |
| • | When the front defogger switch is pressed
then,
The display shows A/C, front defogger and Fresh
air
indicators
|
| • | The temperature of the air is automatically changed to Hot when the Front defogger switch is pressed. However, the user can reduce the temperature by pressing the temperature down button as per wish. |
| • | To quickly remove the fog on the glass, set the blower speed control knob (2) at a high speed position |
| • | DUAL mode will not function in front defogger mode |
To prevent the windshield from fogging up, it is recommended
to set
the air source selection switch (4) to the fresh air intake
mode.
If you press the front defogger switch (1), the fresh air
intake
mode is applied with A/C ON.
When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the
windshield
and windows. The fog will block your view through all
windows and can create a dangerous situation. If this happens, set the air source selection
switch
to the fresh air intake
mode and change the airflow direction toward the windshield.
| • | An extended air conditioner operation in the foot mode, foot & front defogger mode or front defogger modes /foot mode, foot & front defogger mode or front defogger modes may cause the outside of the windshield to fog due to the temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the vehicle. In this case, quickly remove the moisture using the windshield wipers and change the airflow to face-level mode to reduce fogging on the outside of the windshield |
| • | Make sure to remove any foreign matters such as snow and leaves on the air inlets to avoid window fogging, especially in winter and summer |
ETC - Front defogging
operation
| • | Press the front defogger switch (1). (The indicator lamp (C) ON) |
| • | Rotate the blower speed control knob (2) clockwise from the OFF position |
| • | Set the temperature as desired using the control switch (3) |
| • | To quickly remove the fog on the glass, set the blower speed control knob (2) at a high speed position |
To prevent the windshield from fogging up, it is recommended to set the air source selection switch (4) to the fresh air intake mode.
If you press the defroster switch (1), the fresh air intake mode is applied with A/C ON.
When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the windshield and windows. The fog will block your view through all windows and can create a dangerous situation. If this happens, set the air source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode and change the airflow direction toward the windshield.
| • | An extended air conditioner operation in the foot-level, foot/defrost-level or defrost modes may cause the outside of the windshield to fog due to the temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the vehicle. In this case, quickly remove the moisture using the windshield wipers and change the airflow to face-level mode to reduce fogging on the outside of the windshield |
| • | Make sure to remove any foreign matters such as snow and leaves on the air inlets to avoid window fogging, especially in winter and summer |
7.2.5 Replacing Air
Conditioner
Filter
Replace the Air Conditioner
Filter
When
Unpleasant odor is generated at the first operation after a long
unused period. Cooling and blowing capacity have decreased.
| • | Do not apply excessive force to the holders when removing the glove box. It may cause a deformation of holders and results in a loose installation |
| • | Replace air conditioner filter while paying attention to the installing direction |
| • | Replace the air conditioner filter at every 10000 km of driving. However, if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions, such as on dusty or unpaved roads, and excessive air conditioner or heater use, the replacement interval can be shortened |
| • | When the filter is contaminated, it will decrease the cooling or heating capacity of the system and creates unpleasant odors |
| 1. | Detach the locknut (10 MM, 1EA) and screws (2EA) from lower part of the glove box. |
| 2. | Open the glove box by pressing the open switch. |
| 3. | Remove the glove box by loosening 4 screws and
3 of
IP setscrews from upper part of the glove box
|
| 4. | Disconnect the switch wirings (1) and lamp
wirings
(2) while pulling out the glove box
|
| 5. | After detaching the damper cable by pulling it
up,
remove the glove box completely. (When attaching, make sure that the damper
cable passes through the inside of the fixing bracket.)
|
| 6. | Pull out the A/C filter after removing the
fixing
cover by pulling it off using your hand
|
| 7. | Install in reverse order of removal. |
When replacing the filter, the arrow printed on the side of the
filter
should face to the blower motor.
When replacing the filter, the arrow printed on the side of
the
filter should face to the blower motor
8 STARTING AND DRIVING I
8.1 Safety
Tips - Before Starting Your Vehicle
Before starting the
vehicle, inspect the interior and exterior of the vehicle; for any damages, leaks,
loose
parts, foreign
objects/debris. In case of any abnormality noticed, Contact Mahindra Authorised
Dealer.
Before starting your
journey, check and ensure proper functioning of safety devices/components like brake
system,
steering
system, all lamps & tyres. Also ensure no critical warning lamps are ON in the
cluster.
In case of any safety device/component
not functioning as intended or any critical warning lamps found ON in cluster, contact
Authorised Mahindra service center
and get it rectified before starting the journey.
Adjust the seat
headrest,
steering wheel and fasten the seat belt as described in this manual. Never perform any
seat /
steering
adjustments when the vehicle is in motion. Start the vehicle only when seated and
belted in
the driver's seat
Engine idle speed
is
controlled by engine management system. When the engine starts, idle RPM runs higher
than
normal in
order to warm the engine. The engine idle speed RPM reduces once the engine warms
up.
Never start your
vehicle
in a closed garage or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always keep
the
garage door
open or start the engine in an open area.
Mirror Adjustment:
Ensure
that the rear view mirror and both the ORVM’s are adjusted for an unobstructed view of the road
behind.
Exterior Lamps: With
the
help of someone observe and confirm normal operation of all exterior lamps while you work on the
controls from the
driver seat. Also, check functioning of all lamps in the instrument panel.
Door Latches: Check
for
positive closing, latching, and locking of all doors, both from inside and outside.
Fluid Leaks: Check
the area
under the vehicle after an overnight parking for fuel, power steering fluid, brake fluid, engine
coolant, oil,
or other fluid leaks. If leaks are observed contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
8.2 Starting the Engine -
MT
Make sure all vehicle
occupants are properly seated in their seats and have buckled their safety belts. For
more
information
on seat, headrest positioning, safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the “Seat
Belts”
section in this manual.
Before cranking the
engine
| • | Make sure the gear shift lever is in neutral |
| • | Make sure the parking brake is engaged. Turn the key to IGN position but do not turn the key to start |
| • | Few warning lamps briefly illuminate. See “Warning Lamps in the Instrument Cluster” section for more information |
| 1. | Shift the gear shift lever to neutral position. |
| 2. | Apply parking brake. |
| 3. | Turn the ignition ON. |
| 4. | Do not press the accelerator. |
| 5. | Turn the key momentarily to the START position to crank the engine. |
| 6. | Once
the
engine starts, release the key; it will return to the IGN
position.
Do not continue
cranking after the engine has started. This will lead to damage
of
the starter and other engine
components.
|
| 7. | If the engine fails to start, attempt to restart after about 10 seconds |
| 8. | If the engine fails to start even after repeated attempts as per the procedure given above, contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer. |
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 secs before
attempting
to restart the engine.
If the vehicle battery has discharged, use booster
cables, a
booster battery or a battery from another vehicle to start. Jump-starting
a vehicle can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to the “Jump-starting
procedure”
section in this manual.
If the engine still
fails
to start, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance. The idle speed is
controlled
automatically
and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
Observe the following
when
the engine is running:
| • | All warning lamps are OFF |
| • | Low oil pressure lamp is OFF |
After idling for a
few
secs., release the parking brake, depress the clutch, shift the gear shift lever to 1st
gear,
release
the service brake pedal, drive by releasing the clutch and depressing the accelerator
pedal
simultaneously.
8.3 Starting the Engine –
AMT
Make sure all vehicle occupants are properly seated in their
seats and
have buckled their safety belts. For more information
on seat, headrest positioning, safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the “Seat Belts”
section
in this manual.
Starting the vehicle
To start the engine, press the brake pedal and press the engine
start/stop button once with the key inside the vehicle. The
engine can be started from any position (OFF / ACC / ON) of the start/stop switch.
Before cranking the
engine
Ensure the TGS lever is
in
neutral position before starting.
If engine start/stop
button is
pressed without pressing the brake pedal, engine will not start and the vehicle power
modes
will change as follows: OFF→ ON →OFF→ ON
If the engine start/stop
button
is pressed from the OFF position directly, along with the brake in depressed position,
there
may be a small delay in the engine cranking. This is normal and not to be taken as a
fault.
Never press the engine
start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result
in the
engine
turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to
loss
of direction control and braking
function, leading to an accident.
Once the engine is
started, it
would not stop even if the key is not inside the vehicle. Before leaving the driver seat,
always make sure engine start/stop button is in OFF position and always take the Smart Key
with
you. Vehicle safety and security
would be affected if these precautions are not followed.
To prevent damage to the
starter, wait 10 secs before attempting to restart the engine.
If the vehicle battery
has
discharged, use booster cables, a booster battery or a battery from another vehicle to
start.
Jump-starting
a vehicle can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to the “Jump-starting procedure”
section in
this manual.
If the engine still fails to start, contact an Authorised
Mahindra
Dealer for assistance.
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease
as the
engine warms up.
Observe the following when the engine is running:
| • | All warning lamps are OFF |
| • | Low oil pressure lamp is OFF |
After idling for a few secs., release the parking brake, press
the
brake pedal and move TGS lever to desired mode (A/M/R).
release the parking brake and then release the brake pedal. vehicle starts moving as creep
function
comes into action, press
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
8.3.1 Engine Idling - In
Cold
Weather
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold and
prolonged
idling at low ambient temperatures. Long periods of idling
may be harmful to your engine. Combustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel
may
not burn completely. Incomplete
combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the
unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
8.4 Stopping the Engine -
MT
Before turning the engine OFF, always allow the engine to return
to
normal idle speed and run for few secs. This assures proper
cooling and lubrication of the turbocharger. This is particularly necessary after any hard
driving.
To reduce the risk of
personal
injury, before turning OFF the engine and leaving the vehicle, always:
| • | Keep your right foot on the service brake pedal |
| • | Turn front wheels towards the road curb |
| • | Switch OFF the ignition, turn the key to the steering lock position and remove the key |
| • | Firmly engage the parking brake |
| • | Move the gear shift lever to 1st gear position (reverse gear if parking on an incline) |
| • | Slowly release the service brake pedal |
| • | Lock your vehicle when leaving |
8.5 Stopping the Engine -
AMT
Before turning the engine OFF, always allow the engine to return
to
normal idle speed and run for few secs. This assures proper
cooling and lubrication of the turbocharger. This is particularly necessary after any hard
driving.
To reduce the risk of
personal
injury, before turning OFF the engine and leaving the vehicle, always:
| • | When stopping for example, at a traffic light, be sure to depress the brake pedal firmly. For your safety, apply the parking brake, too when stopping on a hill. |
| • | While pressing the accelerator to raise the engine rpm in vehicle stationary condition, make sure that the gear is in "n" position. If the accelerator is operated in any other positions, the vehicle may move and cause an unexpected accident. |
| • | Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running. |
| • | When leaving the vehicle, stop the engine and park the vehicle with a gear engaged. If you need to leave the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brakes firmly, and shift the gearshift lever to the “N” position. Otherwise, the vehicle may move unexpectedly and may cause an accident. |
On a slope, never hold the vehicle at a stop using only the
accelerator pedal or the creeping function. If you perform this
operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound, and in some cases the
engine
will stall. This can also
cause excessive damage to the clutch.
| • | Keep your right foot on the service brake pedal |
| • | Turn front wheels towards the road curb |
| • | To turn the engine OFF, Press the start/stop
button
one time
Firmly engage the parking brake
|
| • | Engage 1st or Reverse gear position using AMT
Gear
shifting lever (TGS lever)
Slowly release the service brake pedal
|
| • | Lock your vehicle when leaving |
8.6 Exhaust Gases
Protection against exhaust gas entry into the vehicles interior
is
considered in the design of the exhaust system.
| • | Vehicle exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide, Carbon Dioxide, Nitrogen Oxides, Hydrocarbons and Particulate Matter. These are potential environmental and health hazards |
| • | Avoid inhaling the exhaust gases. Carbon Monoxide is a colourless and odourless gas and can cause unconsciousness or even death |
| • | If the exhaust system is damaged for any reason or you notice a change in the exhaust noise, have the vehicle checked by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately |
| • | Do not start the vehicle in a closed garage or in an enclosed area where ventilation is poor for the exhaust gases |
| • | Since the engine compartment and exhaust system components are hot and can ignite a fire, do not park or leave the vehicle with the engine idling over dry grass, leaves, paper, rags or any combustible material |
Never keep the engine
running
when the vehicle is parked in an area which is not properly ventilated. This could lead to
serious
respiratory problems and/or death.
8.7 Driving Your Vehicle
8.7.1 Pedals
|
MT
|
AMT
|
 |
 |
|
A: Accelerator Pedal
|
B: Brake Pedal
|
C: Clutch Pedal
|
8.7.2 General Driving
Precautions
Always observe the
following
precautions to minimise the risk of accidents leading to serious personal injury or
damage to
your vehicle.
| • | Before you drive your vehicle, please read this manual carefully |
| • | Before you start driving, check proper operation of the brakes and steering system |
| • | If, while driving, you hear any strange noise or feel unusual vibration, or if you have any concerns whatsoever, or if any warning lamps illuminate or buzzers sound, park/stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Identify the cause and take any necessary remedial action. Contact your Authorised Mahindra Dealer if necessary |
| • | Never overload or improperly load your vehicle |
| • | Always be attentive while driving and follow safe driving practices |
| • | Always maintain the recommended inflation pressure in tyres |
| • | Always drive at a safe speed appropriate for given driving conditions. You must follow the speed limits |
| • | While backing up, keep a constant lookout for people, particularly children, or other obstructions or hazardous material that might be present behind the vehicle |
| • | Avoid loading any items on the roof that will raise the vehicles centre of gravity and make your vehicle more unstable |
| • | Loaded vehicles, with a higher centre of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle |
| • | Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher centre of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have much better control |
| • | When driving off-road or on rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's suspension and chassis |
| • | Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially on rough terrains. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion. Make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes |
| • | If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (e.g. from concrete to gravel/sand/mud/snow) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds, especially the way it responds to steering, braking and accelerating inputs |
| • | Be extremely careful when driving on pavements made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice |
| • | If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake or steering application. Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface |
| • | It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly |
| • | In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilised if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surfaces to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel |
8.7.3 Off-Road Driving
Precautions
| • | When driving off-road or on rugged terrains, never over speed or make sharp turns. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury |
| • | Maintain steering wheel control at all times. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion |
| • | Do not drive horizontally or diagonally across steep slopes, your vehicle can tip over sideways. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred |
| • | Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or map-out your route before driving in the area |
| • | Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud or water |
8.7.4 If your vehicle is
submerged
If Your stationary
Vehicle is
Submerged up to over the bumper
| • | Contact your Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately |
| • | Have the vehicle towed to nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer to check any entry of water into the engine |
| • | All fluids including engine and transmission fluids required to be changed incase of water ingress and contamination |
Never attempt to start the engine, without the advice from
Mahindra Authorised Dealer technician.
| • | Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre centre line |
| • | The engine could get damaged internally, if attempts are made to cross through deep water |
| • | Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient or friction resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Dab the brake pedal while driving to remove the film of water |
8.7.5 Driving Through
Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow
water,
there are a number of precautions that must be considered
before entering the water.
Never drive through
still
water that is higher than the bottom of the axle hubs. Not following this instruction
will
allow
water to enter vehicle components causing internal damage to the components, affecting
driveability, safety, emissions and
reliability.
When driving through
water,
drive very slowly and at constant speed, less than 8 kmph. Drive with accelerator pedal
in
OFF
and control speed, using only the brakes. At higher speed waves can be generated by the
front
of the vehicle. These water
waves may enter air intake, causing severe engine damage or cause a vehicle to get
stalled.
You must slow down
while
driving through shallow water. Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield,
impairing
your vision. In extreme conditions, you may get a water wedge formation between the
road and
tyre causing loss of control
in the vehicle.
| • | The ground under the water might not be firm which could result the water being deeper than expected when driving the vehicle through it |
| • | Do not stop or shut OFF the engine while immersed in water. It helps in preventing water getting inside the exhaust pipes |
| • | When backing down a ramp, do not allow the exhaust tail pipe to immerse in water |
| • | Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure. It may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the oil's lubricating qualities. If these are submerged in water, the lubricants should be replaced as required |
| • | Water entering the transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damaging the transmission |
| • | Sand, mud/sludge that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency. This may also damage brake system components. Wet brakes cannot stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by driving the vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal |
| • | When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through water |
8.7.6 Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm
run-off)
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow
rate is reduced.
The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your
vehicle to
sink into deeper water.
Determine the exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry
point
to compensate for drifting.
8.7.7 After Driving
Off-Road or
through Water
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does
most
on-road driving. Always perform a maintenance inspection
after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or
water.
| • | After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. Completely inspect the underbody of the vehicle for any damages |
| • | Check for accumulations of plants or bushes or polyethylene / plastic. These could be a fire hazard. They might also hide damage to fuel lines, brake tubes/hoses, etc. |
| • | Inspect all the tubes/hoses and check for any fluid leakages |
| • | Get heat exchangers (radiator and condenser) cleaned |
| • | Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, suspension and brakes. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the ‘Repair Manual’ |
| • | We also recommend that the vehicle be checked at the Authorised Mahindra Dealer for any water entry into the transmission/axle or the engine |
Abrasive material in
any
part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not
have full
braking
power when needed leading to accidents. If you have been operating the vehicle in
off-road
conditions, get the brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
| • | If any unusual vibration is experienced, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance. Get it inspected/corrected as soon as possible |
| • | After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission/transfer case/axle oils) to ensure the fluids have not been contaminated |
8.8 Tips for Better
Fuel
Economy
Give due consideration to the points listed below for better
performance of vehicle and enhancement of fuel economy:
| • | Smooth, moderate operation will yield savings in fuel |
| • | Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy |
| • | Ensure that the parking brake is fully released |
| • | Idling for long periods of time will waste fuel |
| • | Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop |
| • | Sudden or hard accelerations reduce fuel economy |
| • | Warming up a vehicle in neutral on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy |
| • | While idling, put the gear shift lever in the neutral position |
| • | Resting your foot on the clutch pedal while driving will reduce fuel economy |
| • | Combine errands and minimise stop-and-go driving |
| • | Keep tyres properly inflated. It is recommended to check your tyre pressure in the morning when the tyre is cold |
| • | Use recommended Lubricants. Refer to the Maintenance Section for specifications and capacities |
| • | Operating with lower quantity or specification may reduce fuel efficiency |
| • | Replace the fuel filter, air filter and AC filter at the recommended intervals |
| • | Shift gears at the recommended speeds and RPM bands only. Refer to the Gear Shifting Speed table for further details |
| • | Control the maximum speed between 80 and 100 kmph in 6th gear to achieve the best fuel efficiency |
| • | Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and perform the owner maintenance checks recommended |
| • | Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer will reduce fuel economy |
| • | Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy |
| • | Adding certain accessories to your vehicle may reduce fuel economy |
| • | Driving on flat terrains offer improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrains |
| • | Close windows during high speed driving for better fuel economy |
| • | It is recommended to refuel in the morning (cold ambient temperature condition) |
| • | Resting your foot on the clutch pedal while driving will reduce fuel economy |
8.8.1 How to Calculate
Fuel
Efficiency (Mileage)
| 1. | Ensure recommended tyre pressure is maintained. |
| 2. | Refuel your vehicle till the fuel gun at the fuel station with auto-cut-off. |
| 3. | Reset trip meter to zero. |
| 4. | Drive at a moderate speed for a minimum distance of 150 km. |
| 5. | Refuel at the same fuel station till the auto-cut-off. |
| 6. | Assuming ‘a’ litres of fuel was filled and ‘b’ was the trip meter reading. Fuel Efficiency = b/a kmpl. |
8.9 Ignition Switch (if equipped)
|
An illuminator ring is provided on the face of the
ignition switch to help in locating the ignition switch at night. The ring
will illuminate the moment the driver door is opened and will remain glowing till
the
driver door is closed.
|
The different positions of the ignition switch are:
LOCK - This is the
ignition
and steering lock position. The vehicle circuits and engine is completely switched OFF. The
steering
wheel is also locked and the key can be removed from the ignition only in this position.
ACC - The steering is
unlocked
and can be rotated. In this position, all electrical circuits are enabled. Use this mode when you
want to listen to music, etc., with the engine temporarily switched OFF.
ON - All electrical
circuits
are enabled. Some of the warning or information lamps illuminate in this position. While some of
the lamps will go out after a few secs., some will continue to remain ON till the engine is
started. When
the vehicle is being
driven, ignition switch remains in the ON position.
Do not leave the ignition in
ON
when the engine is OFF. This could lead to battery drain and ignition switch damage.
START - This position is to start the engine by cranking the starter
motor.
This is a momentary position. When the key is turned
to start position, the starter cranks the engine. Once the engine is running, release the
key,
and the key reverts back to
ON position and the starter motor disengages from the engine.
Do not continue cranking after the engine has started. This
will
lead to damage of the starter and other engine
components.
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering wheel
from
side to side and try again.
The key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When the
key is
removed, the steering column lock is activated and the steering
wheel cannot be turned.
Never return the key to the LOCK position or try to remove
the
key, when the vehicle is in motion. Removing the key allows
the steering wheel to lock. You will lose the control of the vehicle and may cause
serious
accident. Remove the key only when
the vehicle is parked.
Key left warning buzzer:
When opening the driver’s door after the ignition
key
is not removed from lock set, the buzzer will sound to alert you that
the key is not removed. The buzzer will automatically turn off when closing the door or
key is
removed. After this, the buzzer
will not sound even though the door is opened again.
8.10 Horn
|
Press the
pad
on the steering wheel to blow/sound the horn. The horn functions even when
the
ignition has been switched OFF.
|
|
|
Horn will
get
activated when horn switch/pad is pressed.
It will
get
deactivated when horn switch/pad is released or after 10 sec of
continuously
pressing.
|
If Horn Switch Input is ON for more than 10 sec, Horn will
get
deactivate after 10 sec.
8.11 Manual Transmission
The first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat rough. This
is a
normal phenomenon, and precision shifts will develop
within the initial few hundred kilometres of running.
8.11.1 Gear Lever
Your vehicle is fitted with manual transmission having six
forward and
one reverse gear. This shift pattern is imprinted on
the gear lever knob. The transmission is fully synchronised in all forward gears, so shifting to
either a higher or a lower
gear is easily accomplished. The clutch pedal should be depressed fully while shifting, and then
released slowly.
8.11.2 Gear Indicator
|
The current gear lever position is indicated in
the
centre of the speedometer dial.
|
8.11.3 Neutral Position
This position stops
the
transmission of power from the engine to drive axle. With the gear lever in neutral and
brakes released,
the vehicle can move freely by pushing or towing. The engine can be started in this
mode. It
is always recommended to keep
the brake pedal depressed in this position. It is advisable to shift into neutral when
the
vehicle is standstill for longer
durations with the engine idling.
Coasting the
vehicle
with the gear lever in neutral and engine ON/OFF is not recommended. In an event of
panic
braking, you
will not have the power of engine braking to slow down the vehicle. This may lead to
personal injury or accident.
Do not leave the vehicle with the gear lever in neutral
position. Always engage manual parking brake before leaving the vehicle,
to prevent any vehicle movement leading to possible injury to a bystander or
damage to
vehicle.
8.11.4 Gears 1-6
Use the gears 1 to 6 as per vehicle load, road/traffic
conditions or
as per requirement. The current gear selection is indicated
in the cluster.
Always depress the clutch fully before moving the gear
lever
from the current position to any desired position. Perform up-shifts
or down-shifts one gear at a time, do not jump gears.
8.11.5 Recommended Gear
Shifting
Speeds
While driving, shift the gears as per recommended speeds for
getting
optimal Fuel Efficiency.
Upshifting
|
Shift
Range
|
Vehicle
Road Speed
(kmph) |
Tolerance
(kmph)
|
|---|---|---|
|
1-2
|
17
|
+/- 2
|
|
2-3
|
25
|
|
|
3-4
|
38
|
|
|
4-5
|
53
|
|
|
5-6
|
65
|
Downshifting
|
Shift
Range
|
Vehicle
Road Speed
(kmph) |
Tolerance
(kmph)
|
|---|---|---|
|
2-1
|
14
|
+/- 2
|
|
3-2
|
22
|
|
|
4-3
|
35
|
|
|
5-4
|
48
|
|
|
6-5
|
60
|
Shift gears at suitable road speeds to safeguard the
transmission components. Avoid driving in high RPM’s (>3000
RPM).
When parking on an incline, gear alone may not be
sufficient
to prevent the vehicle from moving. Always set the manual parking
brake in addition to shifting the gear lever into gear. It is also recommended to
turn
the front wheels towards the road curb.
8.11.6 Reverse
|
This gear is to enable the vehicle to move in the
reverse direction. Move the gear lever into this position only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the gear lever is in neutral position.
|
The reverse lock ring
located immediately below the gear shift knob must be pulled upward while moving the
shift
lever to
the reverse (R) position.
To avoid transmission damage, shift into or out of
reverse
gear only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
engine is at idle speed. It is recommended you wait approximately for three secs.
in
neutral gear before shifting into or
out of reverse gear.
For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, keep the gear
shift
in neutral and hold the vehicle with the brake pedal. For prolonged
stops, it is recommended to switch OFF the engine and apply the parking brake.
When
stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient,
do not hold it with the clutch/accelerator; use the brake to avoid unnecessary
clutch
wear/heat buildup.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with
access
to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear lever,
which could result in an accident or serious injury.
On slippery/wet road surfaces, never downshift in order
to
obtain braking action. This could result in a wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control.
8.12 Automated Manual
Transmission
(AMT)(if equipped)
AMT has the basic features of conventional manual transmission, but
clutch operation and gear shifting are controlled hydraulically.
Below are the options available in Monostable shifter.
|
N
|
Neutral
|
|
R
|
Reverse
|
|
A/M
|
Automated Mode / Manual Mode
|
|
+
|
Upshift if allowed (During Auto/Manual
drive)
|
|
—
|
Downshift if allowed (During Auto/Manual
drive)
|
The cluster displays the current gear position both in Auto/Manual
modes.
In Auto mode, the gears are displayed as A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 & A6.
In Manual mode, the gears are displayed as M1, M2, M3, M4, M5 & M6.
Neutral and reverse are displayed as “N” and “R” respectively.
In Auto mode, the gears are displayed as A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 & A6.
In Manual mode, the gears are displayed as M1, M2, M3, M4, M5 & M6.
Neutral and reverse are displayed as “N” and “R” respectively.
8.12.1 Driving the Vehicle
Before driving, observe
if any
warning lamps are ON in the cluster. If yes, follow the appropriate checks given in the
“Warning
Lamps Overview” section of the Owner’s Manual.
| 1. | Ensure there are no warning lamps ON in the cluster |
| 2. | Press the brake pedal and start the engine |
| 3. | Allow idling for a few seconds |
| 4. | Shift the gear shift lever to “A/M” once for auto mode and repeat it once again to Manual mode. |
| 5. | Release the parking brake |
| 6. | Release the brake pedal |
| 7. | The vehicle starts to move with the help of the “creep” function |
| 8. | Slowly accelerate to drive away |
While starting on an
incline;
| • | Start the engine as per the “Starting the Engine” procedure |
| • | Shift to “A” or “M” |
| • | Release the brake pedal |
| • | Slowly accelerate and simultaneously release the park brake |
Do not depress both the brake pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. This can cause damage or overheating to the clutch
When you unlock the vehicle or open the driver’s / Co-driver’s
door,
the auto gear shift systems run automatically and you
may hear an operating noise. This sound does not indicate malfunction.
8.12.2 “N” Mode
|
When the “N” mode is selected, the vehicle is in
“Neutral”. This mode can be used for stopping at traffic signals or for momentary
stops along with brake pedal depressed or
park
brake engaged.
|
This prevents the vehicle from moving ahead due to the creep
function.
Tap the gear shift lever to the right to go to “N” position.
Though you can park your
vehicle in “N” mode, it is recommended to shift to “A1” for uphill and to “R” for downhill
parking.
Never shift the gearshift
lever
to the “N” position while driving. This will lead to loss of engine braking and in turn
increase
the braking distance/effort to stop the vehicle.
8.12.3 “A” Mode
When the “A” mode is selected, the vehicle can be driven with
automatic gear shifts as per the vehicle speed. The first gear
is displayed in the cluster as “A1”. As the vehicle speed increases, the appropriate gear is
selected
automatically and the
same is displayed in the cluster.
|
|
Tap the gear shift lever to the left to toggle between “A/M”
modes.
Do not shift the
gearshift
lever to the “N” position while driving. This will lead to loss of engine braking and in
turn
increase
the braking distance/effort to stop the vehicle. If you return the gearshift lever from
“N” to
“A” mode, the appropriate gear
will be selected according to the vehicle speed.
While driving downhill,
it is
recommended to shift to “M” mode and change to lower gear. This will enable engine braking
and
better vehicle control.
8.12.4 “M” Mode
|
When the “M” mode is selected, the vehicle can be
driven with manual gear shifts similar to conventional manual gears.
|
The first gear is displayed in the cluster as “M1”. As the
vehicle
speed increases, manually shift up by tapping the TGS lever
towards “+”. To downshift, tap the TGS lever towards “-”. The cluster displays the current gear
position.
Tap the gear shift lever to the left to toggle between “A/M”
modes.
Automatic Upshifts and
downshifts in Manual Mode:
In manual mode automatic shifts will happen when ENGINE speed meets the allowed engine speed
thresholds for
upshift/downshift.
|
|
 |
Do not shift the
gearshift
lever to the “N” position while driving. This will lead to loss of engine braking and in
turn
increase
the braking distance/effort to stop the vehicle. If you return the gearshift lever from
“N” to
“M” mode, the appropriate gear
will be selected according to the vehicle speed.
8.12.5 “R” Mode
|
When the “R” mode is selected, the vehicle can be
driven in the reverse direction. It is displayed in the cluster along with
a tone.
|
Tap the gear shift lever towards bottom to activate reverse “R”
mode.
To avoid damage to the
transmission system, ensure the vehicle comes to a complete stop before changing from
“A”/”M” to
“R”
mode and vice versa.
8.12.6 “L” Mode(Gear
Lock-out)
|
Gear Lock-out is a safety feature, which prevents
gearbox damage due to sudden direction change (from reverse to forward).
|
| • | Vehicle is moving in reverse direction (speed>5kmph) and if the driver trying to move the TGS lever to A/M position with the brake pedal pressed |
| • | Vehicle is moving in reverse direction (speed>5kmph) and if the driver trying to move the TGS lever to “+” or “-” position with the brake pedal pressed |
During this operation, “L” mode is displayed in the cluster
along
with tone from cluster
8.12.7 Parking your Vehicle
Your vehicle can be
parked
in any gear. Ensure the park brake is engaged before leaving the vehicle. It is
recommended
to
park the vehicle with gear in “A1” for uphill and in “R” for
downhill.
Ensure the correct gear is selected (by looking at the
cluster) before switching off the engine. The gear can be changed in
engine OFF condition.
A buzzer will sound continuously if the vehicle is operated with the gearshift lever In-between of each shift positions. The vehicle will become inoperative if you continue to operate the vehicle with the gearshift lever in between shift positions.
A buzzer will sound continuously if the vehicle is operated with the gearshift lever In-between of each shift positions. The vehicle will become inoperative if you continue to operate the vehicle with the gearshift lever in between shift positions.
While driving the
vehicle, do not shift the gearshift lever to the “N” position. The engine brake may
not
work and you may
get involved in an unexpected accident. If you return the gearshift lever from “N”
to
“A/M.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This operation prevents the vehicle from moving due to unintended activation of the creeping function.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This operation prevents the vehicle from moving due to unintended activation of the creeping function.
Do not operate the
system as described below. The life cycle of the clutch may be
reduced.
| 1. | Using the accelerator pedal to hold the vehicle on an uphill slope with the vehicle in “A” or “M” mode. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning lamp and buzzer will come. |
| 2. | Shifting the gearshift lever to the “A/M”, “M” or “R” position while racing the engine. |
| 3. | Holding the vehicle on an uphill slope using the creeping function. |
| • | If the gear is not engaged properly and completely before the ignition switch is turned to “LOCK” position or the engine switch is pressed to change the ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), the vehicle may not be parked with the gear engaged. Always confirm the gear position by checking the gear position indicator when parking. |
| • | On a downhill slope, the gear should be put in reverse, and in 1st gear on an uphill slope. In case of uphill/downhill slope, after checking the vehicle stopped by the gear engaged, put the chocks under the wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle may move, and cause an unexpected accident. If the gear is left in the “N” position, the vehicle cannot be parked with a gear engaged. |
8.12.8 Kick Down Function
The kick down
strategy is
performed When the driver presses the accelerator pedal beyond a fixed threshold. The
kick
down
strategy allows a down-shift to improve vehicle speed. (example : during over
taking).
8.12.9 Creep Function
In creep function,
when the
gear mode is in either “A” or “M” or “R” positions, and you release your foot off the
brake
pedal,
the vehicle starts moving without pressing the accelerator pedal. You can hold the
vehicle
using the park brake for momentary
stops or shift to ”N” mode.
Creep function will
get
activated when below conditions are met :
| • | Vehicle in stand still condition and engine running |
| • | No any faults related to clutch present in TCU |
| • | Gear mode is in either Automatic (A) or Manual mode (M) or Reverse (R) |
| • | Parking brake released |
| • | Driver & Co-driver door closed |
| • | Brake pedal released |
Creep function gets
disabled if any of the following conditions prevails:
| • | Parking brake engaged |
| • | Driver door/ Co-driver door open |
| • | Brake pedal pressed |
| • | Accelerator pedal pressed |
| • | Any faults related to clutch present |
In-order to enable
the
creep function after meeting all the above mentioned requirements, follow any of the
below
mentioned
step
| • | Tap the brake pedal and release |
| • | Tap the accelerator pedal and release |
Always keep your
foot on
the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. These operations prevent the
vehicle from
starting due to unintended activation of the creeping function.
Avoid the following for
your
safety and for your vehicle durability
| 1. | Using the accelerator pedal to hold the vehicle on an uphill slope operation with the gearshift lever in the “M” of “D” position. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound. |
| 2. | Shifting the gearshift lever to the “M”, “D” or “R” position while racing the engine. |
| 3. | Stopping on a slope using the creeping function. If you perform this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound. |
8.12.10 Winter Mode
Operation
This mode turns
automatically only when both the following conditions are
satisfied:
| • | Altitude 2000 m or above |
| • | Ambient temperature less than 20 degree Celsius |
In this mode, the
driver
can engage 2nd gear in Manual mode. This feature helps in moving the vehicle which got
stuck
in ice.
8.12.11 Starting off on an
uphill/downhill
Uphill
| • | Apply the parking brake firmly so that the vehicle does not roll backwards |
| • | Shift the gearshift lever to the “A/M” position while depressing the brake pedal. Make sure that the gear position indicator in the instrumental cluster displays 1st gear |
| • | Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal gradually, and when the vehicle starts to move, release the parking brake and depress the accelerator pedal to start off |
On an uphill
slope,
never hold the vehicle at a stop using only the accelerator pedal or the creeping
function. If you perform
this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound, and in
some
cases the engine will stall. This can
also cause excessive damage to the clutch. In case the warning buzzer is on,
shifting to
2nd gear will not be possible in manual
mode.
Always use 1st gear while starting off
on a
uphill slope. Otherwise you may damage the clutch.
Use Manual mode while driving in Uphill
Downhill
| • | Depress the brake pedal and shift the gearshift lever to the “A/M” position. Make sure that the gear is in 1st by checking the gear position indicator. |
| • | Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal slowly. Even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed, the clutch will be engaged when the vehicle speed increases. |
Use Manual mode
while
driving in Downhill
On a downhill
slope,
never hold the vehicle at a stop using only the accelerator pedal or the creeping
function. If you perform
this operation for a certain period of time, a warning buzzer will sound, and in
some
cases the engine will stall. This can
also cause excessive damage to the clutch.
| • | To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed and downshift. |
| • | Do not apply the parking brake while driving. Otherwise, it could cause a skid and you may get involved in an unexpected accident. |
| • | If the gearshift lever is unresponsive or the gear is changed to “N” position automatically when the vehicle speed becomes less than 10kmph, there may be a system malfunction. In this case, ask an authorized Mahindra dealer to inspect the auto gear shift system as soon as possible. |
| • | The system will not allow shifting up or down to a gear that would cause engine over-revving or under-revving. |
8.12.12 Starting in Snow or
Slippery surface
| • | Shift to “M” mode. |
| • | Upshift to 2nd gear. |
| • | Slowly release the parking brake, accelerate slowly or drive in idle. |
Up shift to 2nd
gear is
possible based on the altitude and temperature
8.12.13 General AMT
Precautions
Ensure the brake pedal is depressed or park brake
engaged
while vehicle is stopped with the engine running. This will prevent
the vehicle from moving ahead due to the creep
function.
Ensure park brake engaged while vehicle is stopped with
the
engine off.
Any malfunction of the AMT is indicated by the
“Transmission
Malfunction” lamp in the instrument cluster, New key cycle to
be done by switching off the engine, take of the key and then insert key again then
crank
engine. By following this process
vehicle can be driven to nearest Mahindra Authorised
Dealer.
| • | Never use the accelerator pedal to hold the vehicle on an uphill slope with the gear in forward (“A” or “M”) position |
| • | Do not rev the engine with the gear in “A” or “M” position with park/foot brake engaged. This will reduce the clutch life. |
| • | Do not leave the vehicle unattended or with children and the engine running |
| • | Always, put the vehicle in gear, switch off the engine and apply the park brake before leaving the vehicle |
| • | After shifting the automated manual transmission gearshift lever to the “N” position, always check the gear position indicator in the instrument cluster shows the “N” position to make sure that the transmission is disengaged |
| • | If the transmission cannot be put in neutral, turn the key from the “OFF” to the “ON” position, and move the automated manual transmission gearshift lever from “N” to “A/M”, or “R”, then back to “N” again. Then turn the key from the “ON” to the “OFF” position |
| • | These procedures may help put the transmission in neutral. If the transmission still cannot be put in neutral, you cannot tow the vehicle without using a towing dolly |
8.13 AMT Alerts in Cluster
8.13.1 Press Brake Pedal
This alert is displayed when you try to crank the engine or
trying to
engage Automatic/Manual Mode or Reverse gear in standstill
condition without pressing brake pedal.
Along with this alert, a beep sound from the Buzzer will be ON
for 4
times.
When the vehicle is moving in reverse direction (Vehicle speed
> 4
kmph) and if you try to engage Auto/Manual mode using TGS
lever, during this condition also this alert is displayed
If you press the brake pedal, this alert will go off and the
vehicle
can be started.
8.13.2 Transmission
Malfunction
This alert is displayed when there is any malfunction/failure in
AMT
system. Contact your Authorized Mahindra Dealer immediately.
Do not try to drive the vehicle for long time when this alert
is
ON.
8.13.3 Operation not Allowed
This alert is displayed under the following conditions.
| • | When the vehicle is moving in forward direction, If you try to engaged the reverse gear using shift lever |
| • | When the vehicle is moving in reverse direction, if you try to shift lever manually to + or — directly without enabling manual mode |
| • | When the vehicle is stand-still, altitude under 2000 m and Ambient temperature greater than 20 degree Celsius, if you try to engage the 2nd gear manually by tapping the shift lever. |
Along with this alert, Tone comes from cluster.
8.13.4 Go to side and stop
This alert is displayed when there is any critical failure with
respect to Engine/ Transmission / AMT system, where the vehicle
needs to be brought to side of the road and STOP immediately in-order to avoid any serious
personal/
vehicle damage.
Contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer immediately.
In the above cases, pull over to the side of the road and
stop the
engine, and then ask an authorized Mahindra service center
to inspect your vehicle. Otherwise, the clutch disc may be damaged.
8.14 Micro Hybrid Technology
(Engine
Stop/Start System) – MT/AMT (If equipped)
Engine Stop/Start system automatically “stops” and “starts” the
engine
when idle at signals or long traffic jams. This in
turn gives a better fuel efficiency.
8.14.1 Engine Stop/Start
System
Overview– MT
|
Engine Stop/Start system is activated by the
Engine
Stop/Start button in the driver side switch bank. The LED on the button
indicates the status of the button.
|
How does the Engine
Stop/Start
System Work?
Let’s take a simple example of driving in traffic conditions
within
your city. Assume that your vehicle has stopped at a traffic
junction due to a red signal. The following steps illustrate how the system functions:
| • | The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the neutral gear and the clutch pedal is released |
| • | The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the cluster will blink indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically after a specific time period |
| • | The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster indicating the engine was stopped by the “Engine Stop/Start” System |
| • | Once the signal turns green, press the clutch pedal and the engine starts immediately |
| • | The indicator in the cluster goes OFF indicating that the engine has started again and you are ready to drive on |
For auto stop to happen, the
following conditions are to be met:
| • | Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default and should not be turned off using the selection switch |
| • | Bonnet is fully closed |
| • | In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 7 kmph at least once |
| • | Current status of the engine is idling |
| • | Vehicle speed is zero |
| • | Accelerator pedal and clutch pedal are fully released |
| • | Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition |
| • | Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between 25 degree C and 100 degree C). This is an extra precaution to ensure safe working of the engine |
| • | Fuel temperature is less than 60 degree C |
| • | Gear in neutral |
| • | DPF REGEN should not be in active state |
| • | Vehicle should not have DEF error codes E14, E24 & E34 |
| • | OBD and CHECK ENGINE telltale in OFF condition |
For auto start to happen,
the
following conditions are to be met:
| • | Vehicle should have been stopped by the Engine Stop/Start System |
| • | Gear lever is in the neutral position, Clutch pedal is fully de-pressed |
| • | Vehicle speed is zero |
| • | Engine Stop/Start System is in active state |
| • | Bonnet should be closed |
8.14.2 Engine Stop/Start
System
Overview – AMT
|
|
Engine Stop/Start system is activated by the
Engine
Stop/Start button in the driver side switch bank. The LED on the button
indicates the status of the button.
|
How does the Engine
Stop/Start
System Work?
Let’s take a simple example of driving in traffic conditions
within
your city. Assume that your vehicle has stopped at a traffic
junction due to a red signal. The following steps illustrate how the system functions:
| • | The vehicle has come to a halt at a traffic signal, is in the “A” Mode and the brake pedal is pressed |
| • | The Engine Stop/Start lamp in the cluster will blink indicating that the engine is going to stop shortly. The engine will shut down automatically after a specific time period |
| • | The Engine Stop/Start lamp will illuminate in the instrument cluster indicating the engine was stopped by the “Engine Stop/Start” System |
| • | Once the signal turns green, release the brake pedal and the engine starts immediately |
| • | The indicator in the cluster goes OFF indicating that the engine has started again and you are ready to drive on |
For auto stop to happen, the
following conditions are to be met:
| • | Engine Stop/Start system is in active condition by default and should not be turned off using the selection switch |
| • | Bonnet is fully closed |
| • | In the current ignition cycle, the vehicle has crossed 7 kmph at least once |
| • | Current status of the engine is idling |
| • | Vehicle speed is zero |
| • | Brake pedal is fully pressed |
| • | Vehicle battery should be in healthy condition |
| • | Engine is warm (Engine coolant temperature is between 25 degree C and 100 degree C). This is an extra precaution to ensure safe working of the engine |
| • | Fuel temperature is less than 60 degree C |
| • | Gear shift Lever in ‘A’ mode |
| • | Vehicle should not be in slope |
| • | AMT Warning telltale in OFF condition |
| • | OBD and CHECK ENGINE telltale in OFF condition |
For auto start to happen,
the
following conditions are to be met:
| • | Vehicle should have been stopped by the Engine Stop/Start System |
| • | Gear lever is in ‘A’ mode and brake pedal is fully released |
| • | Vehicle speed is zero |
| • | Engine Stop/Start System is in active state |
| • | Bonnet should be closed |
ESS will be operational when the engine coolant temperature
reaches
a minimum operating range.
Frequently Asked Questions
(FAQs)
| 1. | What is the advantage of the system?
The Engine Stop/Start System aids in attaining
better
fuel efficiency on your vehicle and thus reducing your running costs.
However, the mileage improvement will depend upon various parameters such as
prevailing
traffic, driving patterns, etc.
|
| 2. | What are the other advantages of the system?
|
| 3. | Is it possible to start the engine through the
clutch
pedal for the first time?
No, the engine can be cranked only with the
ignition
key for the first time. If the engine is stopped automatically by the
system, only then it is possible to start the engine through clutch pedal in MT.
|
| 4. | How to activate/deactivate the system?
The system is activated by default during every
ignition cycle. The LED indication on the Engine Stop/Start switch indicates
the status of the system. The system can be turned OFF or back ON using the
Engine
Stop/Start switch.
|
| 5. | Whether the system will get activated as soon
as the
engine is started the first time with the ignition key?
No, the Engine Stop/Start system can be activated
only
by the Engine Stop/Start switch, provided all listed conditions (in
the previous section) are met. This is to ensure better performance of the engine
in
terms of fuel economy and durability.
|
| 6. | What is to be done, if I don’t want the system
to
stop my engine at traffic signals/jams?
The system can be turned OFF by the Engine
Stop/Start
button in the central bezel switch bank.
|
| 7. | Whether the A/C will function, if the engine is
switched off?
No, the A/C will not work. However, the blower
will be
in operation when the ignition is ON.
|
| 8. | What will happen if I keep the clutch
continuously
pressed at traffic signals/jams?
The system will not stop the engine if the clutch
is
continuously pressed since it indicates the driver’s intention of moving
the vehicle immediately.
|
| 9. | When the battery charge is low, whether the
engine
will be switched off?
If the battery charge drops below a certain
threshold
level, the system will not stop the engine so as to preserve the battery
from further draining.
|
| 10. | Whether I will be able to operate the engine
with the
normal ignition key?
Yes, normal operation with the ignition key is
always
possible.
|
| 11. | Whether the vehicle will start (or) stop in
gear for
MT?
The vehicle will not start or stop automatically
in
gear to ensure safety. It will do so only in the neutral position of the
gear lever.
|
| 12. | Whether the system will stop my engine in
moving
traffic?
No, the engine will be stopped only when the
vehicle
speed is zero.
|
| 13. | Whether the audio system will be switched OFF,
when
the engine shuts down?
No, the audio system will not be switched OFF and
you
can continue to enjoy the music.
|
| 14. | Whether the engine will re-crank whenever the
clutch
pedal is pressed in MT?
No, when the engine is running, the starter motor
will
not attempt to re-crank.
|
| 15. | If any component involved in the system fails,
what
will happen?
The system has a built-in diagnostic module which
understands the failure and immediately goes to bypass mode. In the bypass
mode, the engine can be turned ON and OFF by ignition key as usual.
|
8.15 Fuel-BS VI
|
For Diesel: Use
commercially
available vehicular Ultra-low Sulfur Highway Diesel that meets the BIS standard (IS 1460; 2017 BS
VI
specification
or equivalent). Information on diesel quality can normally be found in the fuel pump.
Please contact filling station personnel in case labels in the pump
cannot be found. If the diesel fuel with high sulfur content
(more than 10 PPM) and unspecified additives are used, it can cause the DPF system damage and
emission
warranty issues.
For Petrol: Use only
commercially available petrol fuel confirming to IS 2796:2017 BS6 specification or equivalent and /
or
E20 fuel
confirming to IS 17021;2018 specification. In either case of fuel, minimum Research Octane Number
(RON)
to be 95. Information
on petrol quality can normally be found in the fuel pump. Please contact filling station personnel
in
case labels in the pump
cannot be found.
Do not “top up” after the
nozzle
automatically shuts off when refuelling
Always check that the fuel
cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident
Do not fill the fuel tank or
mix
the fuel with alcohol based fuels, kerosene, etc. This will damage the engine, fuel and
exhaust
system components.
If you have accidentally
filled
the fuel tank with incorrect or non- approved fuel, do not start the vehicle. Contact an
Authorized
Mahindra Dealer to have the fuel system drained completely.
8.15.1 Fuelling during
Winter
During freezing weather, if fuel is not winterised or is
insufficiently winterised, waxing/gelling may start in fuel, leading
to interruption in fuel supply to engine. For smooth functioning and reliable operation of the
engine
during cold weather
conditions, use winterised ULSD which are available at the filling stations during winter
months.
Check with your fuel retailer
for further details.
Avoid inhaling fuel
vapours and
any skin or clothing contact. Direct skin contact with diesel or the inhalation of fuel
vapour may affect your health.
Diesel is highly
flammable and
poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Never allow sparks, flames or
smoking materials near diesel. Turn OFF the engine before refuelling. Whenever you are
around
diesel, extinguish all smoking
materials.
8.15.2 Minimum Fuel
Requirement
It is recommended maintaining a minimum of 10 litres of fuel in
the
fuel tank. Driving the vehicle till the fuel tank is
empty is not recommended. Always have sufficient fuel in the tank. Check the fuel level prior to
starting your journey.
Never carry fuel in
separate
containers in the vehicle, it is dangerous and may lead to inadvertent fuel leak or
spillage.
8.16 Brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes in the front wheels and
disc/drum (if equipped) brake in rear wheels. Disc brakes
offer good braking capability and reduced stopping distance. Wet brake discs result in reduced
braking
efficiency. After a
car wash or driving the vehicle through water, pump the brake pedal mildly while driving to remove
the
film of water from
the brake pads. Brake pads feature wear indicator. When the front brake pad is worn out, there will
be an
indication in the
cluster; the brake warning lamp will be ON. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous. Stopping distance
increases
considerably when braking. Dry the brakes by driving at
very slow speed and applying the brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes
normal.
Even if the power assist (vacuum assistance) is completely
lost,
the brakes will still work. The brake pedal would be much
harder than normal and the vehicle stopping / braking distance will be longer than
usual.
Brake squeal occurs
as a
high frequency whistling noise usually at the end of the stop while pressing the brake
pedal,
squeal
can occur from front or rear or from both ends. This is a normal condition caused by
environmental factors such as cold, wet,
snow, etc and vehicle usage pattern
Brake Creep-Groan
occurs as
a low-frequency (Kar-Kar) noise which occurs in AMT vehicles when the vehicle is ON and
D/R
mode
is selected and the brake pedal is released slowly to move the
vehicle
8.16.1 Parking on a
Hill/Incline
If you have to park facing uphill, select first gear and turn
the
front wheels away from the kerb. If you have to park facing
downhill, select reverse gear and turn the front wheels towards the kerb. Always ensure that the
vehicle is in gear and parking
brakes is engaged before leaving the vehicle.
8.16.2 Parking Brake
|
To
apply the
parking brake, hold and pull the park brake lever up as firmly as
possible.
When the parking brake is applied
with the ignition ON, the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster
illuminates.
|
To release the
parking
brake, pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the release button on the bottom
of
the lever
and lower the parking brake lever completely.
The brake warning lamp indicates only the parking brake status. It does not indicate the degree of brake application. Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in gear. When parking on a hill; first apply the parking brake; after that shift the TGS lever to 1st gear. This will avoid the load on the transmission, locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of gear.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving off. Failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes. It will also result in reduced fuel efficiency; lowered brake pad life and rear brake squeal.
| • | The parking brake should be adjusted as per recommended maintenance schedule |
| • | Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle, and be certain to leave the transmission in gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage, hit a bystander resulting in personal injury |
| • | Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the gear shift lever. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could move the vehicle leading to accidents |
| • | The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle |
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can
cause
the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of
the vehicle and cause an accident.
8.17 Hazard Activation Upon
Crash
Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate
event
of an accident where Airbags are deployed. In such
a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 min or it can be turned off by operating Hazard
switch
(Off to On) or Ignition
reset (Ignition Off and On)
Once activated hazard remains on for 30 minutes by default
Deactivation
| • | 30 minutes since activation is elapsed |
| • | Hazard switch On to Off transition is made |
| • | IGN turned Off and again turned On |
8.18 Vehicle Breakdown Warning
In case of a brake down, hazards would be turned on automatically
to
indicate oncoming traffic. This feature will come into
action upon opening the bonnet when vehicle speed is less than 5 kmph.
8.19 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-lock Brake System (also called as ABS) is designed to help
prevent lock-up of the wheels and stable stopping of vehicle
during a sudden, panic emergency braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. The ABS system takes
input
from wheel speed
sensors and brake pedal switch to control the brake fluid pressures at the wheels to avoid wheel
lock-up.
It allows vehicle
to be steered during braking.
The minimum speed for ABS to function is 12 kmph. ABS is activated
only
during wheel lock conditions where ABS takes over
and prevents wheel lock.
During the ABS operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in the
brake
pedal to indicate ABS is active. You may also hear motor
noise from the engine compartment. It is recommended to hold the brake pedal firmly while the ABS
is
active rather than pumping
the brake pedal.
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces as on a
manhole
cover, a steel plate at a construction site, a joint
in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day, tends to activate the anti-lock brake system.
The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch ON the ignition and
should
go out after a few seconds. If the ABS warning lamp
does not go out or if it comes ON while driving, it means there is a fault in the ABS system. In
both
cases, the normal braking
system remains efficient, exactly as on a vehicle without ABS. The vehicle should be examined as
soon as
possible by an Mahindra
Authorised Dealer.
The ABS is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always
drive
at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front of you. The stopping distance may be longer in the following cases:
| • | Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads |
| • | Driving with tyre chains installed |
| • | Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road |
| • | Driving on roads where the road surface is potholes or large differences in surface height |
Do not overestimate the
Anti-lock
Brake System: Although the Anti-lock Brake System assists in providing vehicle control,
it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe
distance
from the vehicle in front
of you. There are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel
operation
even with ABS active.
If tyre grip performance
exceeds
its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the
Anti-lock
Brake System will not be able to completely avoid wheel lock-up
8.20 Electric Brake Force
Distribution
(EBD)
EBD is a subsystem of the ABS system, It prevents least loaded
wheel from
locking on application of brakes, thus allows the
wheel to maintain tractive contact with the road surface. The system monitors the wheel speed and
when it
identifies any slip,
the pressure in the wheel cylinders is dumped thus preventing the wheels from locking.
A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the parking brake
as
well as ABS warning lamps. The vehicle should be examined
as soon as possible by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
8.21 Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)
(if equipped)
This system enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle
under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects for
over-steering and under-steering behavior of the vehicle by applying the brake on the appropriate
wheel
automatically.
ESC uses inbuilt sensors to determine the path that the driver
intends to
steer the vehicle , compares it to the actual path
of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the brake of
the
appropriate wheel
to assist in counteracting the condition of over-steer or under-steer.
|
Over-steer -
When the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Under-steer -
When the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
|
The ESC cannot overrule the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction due to
the prevailing road conditions. The ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting
from
excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skilful
driver can
prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle can not compensate for reckless or dangerous driving
that
could endanger the user’s
safety or the safety of others on road or passerby.
8.21.1 ESC ON
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
active
mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
When the ESC is in operation, ESC indicator lamp blinks in the
instrument cluster.
When the ESC is
operating, you
can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and
indicates nothing unusual.
When moving out of the
mud or
slippery road, accelerator response may be different because ESC system controls the
engine
RPM to come out of this slippery road condition. This is normal.
8.21.2 ESC OFF
In some driving conditions, to maximise traction, it may be
beneficial
to de-activate ESC.
Such conditions are:
| • | To start in deep snow or on a loose surface |
| • | Driving in deep sand |
| • | Driving through deep mud etc. |
To de-activate ESC, press ESC OFF button on the central bezel
switch
bank. Once ESC OFF mode is selected, a warning indicator
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Press ESC OFF button again to activate ESC function.
Mahindra recommends that
ESC be
operational in all normal driving conditions.
When ESC is in OFF mode,
other
functions like HHC (Hill Hold Control), HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist), HDC (Hill Descent
Control),
DTC (Drag Torque Control), ROM (Roll Over Mitigation) will be in working mode.
However, for safety
reasons, if
the ESC system detects that the vehicle is going into a unstable condition, ESC will be
automatically
activated on depressing the brake pedal
ESC, by default, will be
in ON
condition for every ignition cycle.
If the ESC indicator blinks while driving, it indicates that ESC
is
working. If this indicator illuminates continuously, it
indicates a malfunction in the ESC system. Drive carefully to the nearest Authorised Mahindra
Dealer
and get the ESC system
checked.
8.21.3 Uphill and Downhill
Driving
To prevent the engine from labouring at a low RPM when driving
uphill
gradients or with your vehicle heavily loaded, downshift
when necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best torque range. Similarly, while driving
downhill,
downshift to utilise
the engine braking in an optimum manner.
8.21.4 Engine Idling
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease
as the
engine warms up.
Observe that all warning lamps are OFF when the engine is
running.
After idling for a few secs, follow the below steps to drive
away:
| 1. | Release the parking brake. |
| 2. | Depress the clutch. |
| 3. | Shift the gear lever to 1st gear. |
| 4. | Release the service brake pedal. |
| 5. | Drive by releasing the clutch and depressing the accelerator pedal simultaneously. |
Engine Idling - In Cold
Weather
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold and
prolonged
idling at low ambient temperatures. Long periods of idling
may be harmful to your engine. Combustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may
not
burn completely. Incomplete
combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the
unburned
fuel can enter the crankcase,
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
You must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulphur Diesel. For
smooth
functioning and reliable operation of the engine during
cold weather conditions, use winter diesel for refuelling which is available at filling stations
during winter months. Check
with your fuel retailer for details.
The recommended engine coolant mixture will work fine till
ambient
temperatures do not drop below -32ºC approx. For ensuring
above performance, it is a must that you use only recommended engine coolant.
8.22 Wheels and Tyres
8.22.1 Tyre Information
|
|
A
|
RADIAL TYRES OR BIAS-PLY TYRE
|
|
B
|
“TUBELESS” OR “TUBE TYPE”
|
|
C
|
TYRE SIZE
|
|
D
|
MAX. LOAD LIMIT
|
|
E
|
TREAD WEAR
|
8.22.2 Tyre Rating
Your vehicle is originally equipped with tyres supplied by a
reputable
manufacturer. If you ever have any questions regarding
your tyres, please refer to literature supplied by the tyre manufacturer, or to the separate
tyre
warranty provided by the
tyre manufacturer. You may also contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer directly, or the tyre
manufacturer.
The tyre rating of XUV300 is:
| • | 205/65/R16 (or) 215/55/R17 |
| • | Temporary Spare Tyre T135/90/R16 (If applicable) |
Tyre rating is explained as below:
Tyre size (Example: 205/65
R16
95H)
Callout (A) : 205
(Three-digit
number) : This number gives the width in millimetres of the tyre from sidewall edge to
sidewall edge. This is called as “Section Width”.
Callout (B) : 65 (Two-digit
number) : This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tyres ratio of height to
section
width.
Callout (C) : R :
This is
the Tyre Construction Code. The “R” stands for Radial.
Callout (D) : 16 (Two-digit
number) : This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
Callout (E) : 95 (Two or
three-digit number) : This number is the tyres load index. It is a measurement of how
much
weight each tyre can support.
Callout (F) : H :
Tyre
speed rating or speed symbol. Never drive the vehicle faster than the tyre speed rating. The
speed
rating denotes
the speed at which a tyre is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure.
Recommended for
replacement of
Tyre should be of same type of Tyre
8.22.2.1 Speed Rating
|
SPEED
SYMBOL
|
MAX.
SPEED CAPABILITY
|
SPEED
SYMBOL
|
MAX.
SPEED CAPABILITY
|
|---|---|---|---|
|
KM/HR
|
KM/HR
|
||
|
L
|
120
|
T
|
190
|
|
M
|
130
|
U
|
200
|
|
N
|
140
|
H
|
210
|
|
P
|
150
|
V
|
240
|
|
Q
|
160
|
W
|
270
|
|
R
|
170
|
Y
|
300
|
|
S
|
180
|
Z
|
240+
|
8.22.3 Tyre Label (Vehicle
Placard)
|
|
Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard) is located on the driver side inner
B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about
tyre size designed for your vehicle, and the tyre inflation pressures for the front & rear
tyres.
|
XUV300
VEHICLE COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE
bar/psi/kPa |
|
|---|---|
|
TYRE
|
205/65/R16 (or) 215/55/R17
|
|
R
16
|
2.2 / 32 / 220 (Front and Rear)
|
|
R
17
|
2.2 / 34 /220 (Front and Rear)
|
|
R 16
(Temp
Tyre)
|
4.1/60/414
|
Never overload your
vehicle.
Overloading can cause tyre failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance,
resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Improper inflated tyres
can
adversely affect vehicle handling or can fail unexpectedly, resulting in an accident
and/or
serious personal injury.
8.22.4 Tyre Pressure
Proper Tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are
affected by improper Tyre pressure:
| • | Safety |
| • | Economy |
| • | Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability |
Proper Tyre inflation contributes to a comfortable and safe
ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal Tyre pressures can cause erratic and
unpredictable
steering response or may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to
develop across the Tyre tread. These abnormal wear patterns
will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier Tyre replacement. Under inflation also
increases Tyre rolling resistance
and results in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold Tyre
inflation pressure is listed in the Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard), located on the front
passenger side
inner B-pillar.
8.22.5 Tyre Rotation
Recommendations
Type 1 - Applicable for all
5
Steel
|
Tyres on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate
at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking
functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular
wear
patterns.
|
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet
traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet
ride. Follow the recommended Tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.
Type 2 – Applicable for All
wheel
Drive Vehicles
It is recommended rotating the tyres as per the “Maintenance
Schedule”.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in
the
diagram. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-road type tyres.
|
Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet
ride. Follow the recommended Tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving.
|
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons
for any
rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to
rotation being performed.
8.22.6 Temporary Spare Wheel
(If
applicable)
|
Regular
Tyre
|
Temporary
Tyre
|
|
|
The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary
purpose
only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running.
When Using the Temporary
Spare
Wheel
| • | Temporary Spare Wheel provided specifically designed for your vehicle. |
| • | Do not use more than one Temporary Spare Wheel simultaneously. |
| • | Drive the shortest possible distance with Temporary Spare Wheel. |
| • | While using Temporary spare wheel reduce speed, Avoid sharp cornering, Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking. |
When Temporary Spare Wheel
is
attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the
following
systems may not operate correctly:
ABS, Cruise control (If equipped), EPS, Rear View monitor system
(If
equipped), Navigation system (If equipped)
Speed Limit when using
Temporary
Spare tyre
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a Temporary
Spare
Wheel is installed on the vehicle.
The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at high
speeds.
Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident
causing death or serious injury.
| • | The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the Temporary Spare tyre compared to when driving with standard tyres. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces. |
| • | Inflate the tyres as per manufacturers recommendation, refer Tyre pressure label on the door panel |
| • | TPMS is not provided in temporary spare wheel |
| • | Do not fit tyre chains to the Temporary
spare
tyre. Tyre chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance. |
| • | Tyre to be loaded within the max allowable load limit specified by the load rating index marked on the tyre. |
| • | Tyre to be operated with in the speed limit specified by the speed rating index marked on the tyre |
| • | The tread depth of temporary tyre is lesser compared to regular tyre. Hence do not use the temporary tyre for longer distance than recommended. Repair & refit the regular tyre as soon as possible. |
| • | Recommended to drive Max 50 km in a stretch or reach nearest Mahindra authorised dealer |
8.22.7 Changing a Flat Tyre
Refer to “Changing a Flat Tyre” section in the Emergencies
chapter for
details.
8.22.8 Wheel Tightness
When you change a wheel, remove all rust and dirt at all
locations
where the wheel contacts the wheel hub. Use a scraper or
wire brush to be sure that you remove all rust and dirt. A loose wheel could have damaged or
elongated
the holes in the rim,
or damaged the rim/hub assembly. If any of the wheel studs or nuts are damaged, contact the
nearest
Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
Always tighten the nuts
in a
criss-cross sequence. Never use oil or grease on your wheel studs or nuts.
Never overtighten the
nuts on
the wheel stud. You could damage the stud or the nut.
Torque tighten the wheel
nuts
to the specified value at the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer .
The tyres fitted in this
vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and they comply with the requirements under the
Central
Motor
Vehicles Rules (CMVR) 1989.
8.23 Tiretronics (if equipped)
The tiretronics system checks the pressure and temperature of the
air
inside the pneumatic tyres of the vehicle. System alerts
the driver during driving if any of the tyre parameters are not in acceptable limits due to any
reason.
The system will continue to alert until the warning condition is
resolved
to the actual placard values.
Appropriate tyre pressure and tyre temperature is required for;
| • | Adequate braking |
| • | Road grip |
| • | Vehicle handling |
| • | Vehicle maneuvering |
| • | Reduced tyre wear and tear |
| • | Reduced tyre strain and safety |
| • | Good fuel efficiency |
The cluster screen displays all alerts related to Tiretronics on
the
cluster screen and indicates the visual warnings for
all Tiretronics alerts.
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|
 |
 |
 |
LCD: Whenever low pressure or high pressure or leakage observed,
corresponding tyre shall
blink with LP/HP/LE with pressure value
TFT: Whenever low pressure or high pressure or leakage observed,
corresponding tyre shall
be highlighted
8.23.1 Operation of
Tiretronics
Tiretronics uses wireless sensor technology that is mounted on
the
wheel rim to checks the tyre pressure levels. They transmit
the data to the receiver inside the vehicle which is in turn is communicated and displayed on
the
instrument cluster.
In the cluster screen all the tyre locations will display the
status
as pressure and temperature except spare tyre.
The Tiretronics has been customized only for the manufacturer’s
genuine tyres and wheels. Tiretronics pressure limits and
warning messages have been established and calibrated for the tyre size equipped on your
vehicle.
Replacement of manufacturer’s
parts with a different size, type or style of components may damage the sensor and lead to
incorrect
readings.
Do not use aftermarket tyre sealants or balance beads if your
vehicle
is equipped with Tiretronics. Failure to comply may
lead to sensor damage.
The Tiretronics is not intended to replace normal tyre care and
maintenance or to warn of any tyre failure condition. The
system should not be used as a replacement for a pressure measuring gauge to adjust the vehicle
tyre
pressure.
Driving with under-inflated tyres cause the tyres to overheat
and may
lead to tyre failure. Under-inflated tyres reduce fuel
efficiency, tyre tread life and may affect the vehicle's maneuverability and braking ability.
It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre
pressure
using an accurate pressure gauge, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tiretronics warning indicator.
8.23.2 Tiretronics Warning
Lamp
The Tiretronics warning lamp in the instrument cluster
illuminates for
any alert condition and also for low/high tire pressure
alerts and malfunction.
8.23.3 Tiretronics Sensor
Installation
First apply lubricant (paste) or soapy water to rim hole or
valve
nozzle bar, as shown in the following figure (the diagram
is for reference only, and it is operated according to the degree of automation of the
customer's
production line)
| 1. | Line the sensor up with the rim hole and attach the TTV insertion tool to the end of the valve ready for pull in |
| 2. | Ensure the TTV insertion tool is positioned to the correct notch and that the sensor is pulled through in a direction parallel to the valve whole axis and NOT at an angle to it |
| 3. | The picture below shows a correctly fitted
sensor.
Note the rubber bulb of the valve resting against the rim and the front
face of the enclosure is NOT touching the rim. Apply tyre soap solution to the
rubber
portion of the valve stem and the top
of the enclosure
|
| 4. | Place the inner tyre bead over the rim |
| 5. | Place the outer tyre bead over the rim |
| 6. | Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressure, check the valve area for leakage and re-balance the wheels prior to installing back on the vehicle |
Starting to mount the
tyre from
the valve location is a wrong fitment. The fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage
it. Start from the opposite direction.
8.23.4 Tiretronics Sensor
Removal
| 1. | Remove the tyre from the rim |
| 2. | Remove the valve core to deflate the tire. |
| 3. | Remove the tread and ensure that the extractor
forceps is inserted into the tire at the yellow position shown below and turn
the rim clockwise.
|
| 4. | To remove the sensor, firstly remove the screw
using
a T6 TORX screwdriver.
|
| 5. | Carefully and firmly pull the enclosure
straight back
off the valve
|
| 6. | Cut the rubber bulb and attach the TTV tool to the valve. Remove the valve from the rim by pulling through the rim, or simply pull through without cutting the bulb |
| 7. | Lift the outer tyre bead over the rim using a
tyre
tool
The
valve
must be positioned just left of the start position to avoid sensor
damage. Do
not touch the sensor with the tyre
tool.
|
| 8. | Lift the inner tyre bead over the rim using the tyre tool |
| 9. | Remove existing valve stem
Starting to
mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. Fixing
tool/stem
may hit the sensor and damage it.
Start from the opposite direction.
|
8.23.5 Functionalities of
Tiretronics System
| • | Low Pressure Alert |
| • | High Pressure Alert |
| • | Pressure Leakage Alert |
| • | Sensor Signal Missing (Communication error) |
| • | Tiretronics Sensor Faulty. |
Low Pressure Alert
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|
|
Low pressure monitoring is to indicate low tyre pressure. Please
note
the following points.
| • | Low pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes below threshold also low pressure will be set based on the temperature value. |
| • | Low pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. |
| • | If low pressure is observed, respective tyre should be rectified with cause of low pressure and then fill air |
| • | Once low pressure alert is set with tyre pressure below threshold the alert shall not be cleared until the pressure is filled to the placard value |
High Pressure Alert
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|
|
High pressure monitoring is to indicate high pressure alert.
Please
note the following points.
| • | High pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes to certain values |
| • | High pressure alert in the main alert screen will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the tiretronics screen |
| • | If high pressure value is observed, air has to be released from the respective tyre until the pressure reduces to the placard value |
| • | The vehicle should be driven above 40 kmph for the new pressure value to be updated and the alert to be cleared |
| • | Once the high pressure alert is triggered the alert shall not get cleared until the respective tyre pressure is reaches to the certain value |
Pressure Leakage
Alert
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|
|
Pressure leakage monitoring is to indicate any pressure leakage
in any
of the vehicle tyres. Please note the following points.
| • | The pressure leakage alert will be set only when the tyre pressure is leaking at a rate |
| • | In the pressure leakage condition if the tyre pressure goes too low beyond the certain value then the low pressure alert will also be set |
| • | The pressure leakage alert in the main alert screen will pop up once when the alert is set for driver notification and will be shown in tiretronics screen when the vehicle is in running condition/ignition ON condition |
| • | Once pressure leakage is observed the respective tyre should be observed for air leakages and the puncture condition has to be rectified. Proper placard value should be filled after puncture rectification |
| • | If the vehicle is running in an extremely rocky and acute bumpy condition then fluctuating pressure leakage alert may get set which will get rectified when the vehicle runs back on a normal road. This happens due to sudden change in pressure levels due to rocky conditions |
Sensor Signal Missing Alert
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|
|
When the vehicle is running in speeds between 40 kmph and 120
kmph
then the Tiretronics system should always keep receiving
the signals from all of the running tyres.
| • | On account of any issue in signal reception or Tiretronics sensor damage or tyres changed with out performing manual learning then the signal will not be received |
| • | Under such condition if the vehicle was driven for more than certain value without signal being received at least once, then ‘Signal missing’ will be set for respective tyre position on the cluster screen. The Tiretronics cluster telltale is also illuminated to indicate the same. |
| • | When the Tiretronics signal missing is set then perform manual learning once. If manual learning is not done successfully then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be checked by carefully opening the tyre |
| • | If the sensor is found to be damaged then it should be replaced with a new one and manual learning should be done |
Sensor Faulty/ Low Battery
Alert
The Tiretronics sensor in the vehicle tyres has an internal
individual
battery to each sensor fixed. If the battery level
is too low or the sensor by itself is malfunctioning then the Tiretronics system shall give this
alert.
| • | If the Tiretronics sensor low battery/faulty is set then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be removed by carefully opening the tyre and replacing it with a new sensor |
| • | Post replacing the new sensor, manual learning should be done |
8.23.6 Tiretronics Learning
After a tyre rotation or tiretronics sensor replacement, the
receiver
must be learnt, else the tiretronics warning lamp
indicates a malfunction.
Mandate Points
Manual learning is the process by which the identities of 4
sensors
installed inside the tyres are learnt and programmed in
to the memory of the receiver module.
| 1. | Manual learning should be compulsorily
performed on
any of the following conditions or operations done
|
| 2. | Once manual learning is initiated, the sensors inside the tyres need to be triggered by leaking the air from each tyre one at a time and should be completed within certain value post to each event for learning all 4 tyres |
| 3. | Do not perform Manual learning process at the same time on two vehicles with in the radius of 20 meters |
| 4. | It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre. |
| 5. | It is required to ensure the tyres have pressure > 32psi and < 36psi before initiating the manual learning process |
| 6. | Post manual learning, all tyres should be filled to the placard pressure value |
It is mandatory that
manual
learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right
tyre,
rear
right tyre and rear left tyre .
Initiating the Manual
Learning
Process
| 1. | Press the Trip button which is located in Below Infotainment system as shown in above fig. |
| 2. | Turn the ignition key on |
| 3. | Wait for the cluster’s tachometer and
speedometer to
rotate to highest position and then release the mode button. Then observe
the cluster for the Tiretronics telltale to blink, vehicle buzzer will come 2
times,
turn lamps turn on for 2 times and cluster
screen shows ‘Manual TPMS Learn’
|
During learning
corresponding
tyre shall blink. Example: During Front Left Tyre learning “FL ” shall blink
If failed to enter in to the manual learning mode;
| • | Try initiating the manual learning once again |
| • | Check if the reverse gear is engaged, if it is engaged disengage it |
| • | Check if the cluster mode button is working fine |
If problem still persist, contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer
for
further assistance.
8.23.7 Tiretronics Learning
Procedure
1. Press the Trip button and turn ignition ON along with
the button pressed and release Trip button after 3 sec (IGN ON)..
The cluster screen displays as above and tiretronics warning lamp in the cluster starts
blinking
& vehicle buzzer 2 times
and Turn lamps turn On for two times.
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|
|
2. Start removing air from front left tyre, once the tyre gets
learnt,
vehicle buzzer and hazard lamps flash once. The cluster
screen display is as shown.
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|
|
|
3. Repeat the above step for front right tyre, rear right tyre
and
rear left tyre (in the same order). Corresponding cluster
screen displays are as shown.
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|
|
4. Once the tyre gets learnt, vehicle buzzer and hazard lamps
flash 1
time to indicate all the tyres were learnt. The cluster
screen display is as below indicating all tyres were learnt successfully.
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|
|
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|
|
If there were any problem in learning, the buzzer and hazard
lamps
flash 4 times to indicate the tyre learning was not complete.
5. If learning is not successful at any point of time; or at any
point
of time during the learning process if the learning
takes more than 90 secs of time for each tyre position then the system shall exit the learning
mode
and show the ‘TIRETRONICS
PROGRAM FAILURE screen.
|
LCD
|
TFT
|
|
|
Buzzer will come during
TPMS
learning process as per variant applicability
Limitations
| • | The Tiretronics monitors only tyre pressure and temperature. It does not monitor conditions such as tyre wear |
| • | The Tiretronics will not be able to detect an instant tyre burst and inform the driver in advance |
| • | There may be the possibility of getting all the tyre location indicators on the Tiretronics display blinking along with the Tiretronics telltale, on passing environment area prone to heavy power lines and RF signal. It will come back to normal condition whenever interference gets cleared |
8.23.8 Tiretronics — Points
to
Remember
| • | It is recommended to fill the pressure to 32 psi at a digital gauge station only |
| • | Every 15 days, inflate all the tyres up to 32 psi and inflation should be done at cold condition/ambient temperature |
| • | Pressure deviation between the Tiretronics
display
and gauge will depend upon the following factors:
|
| • | Tiretronics measures the absolute pressure of the tyre, not relative pressure (gauge pressure) |
| • | Pressure deviation is defined for 0.5 psi (min) and 3 psi (max) |
| • | If the vehicle battery/fuse is disconnected and reconnected, it will update the pressure after the vehicle is driven or sensor is activated |
| • | It is mandatory that manual learning should be performed if the vehicle tyres are rotated or any of the tyres sensors are replaced, else the system will give a false alert with respect to false location |
| • | If more than one tyre needs to be learned, learn all 4 tyres as per manual learning procedure |
| • | Tiretronics is only a warning or indicating device. Pressure and temperature values displayed by the system is for indication prior to alert purposes only. The Tiretronics system should not be used as a measuring device to correlate or calibrate against other systems |
| • | During winter or in cold conditions, there may be chances of getting a pressure alert with the corresponding tyre location indicator in the display, if the tyre pressure is near the thresholds level. i.e. between 28 psi to 24 psi. However, this alert will get cleared after driving a few kilometers depending upon the climatic condition |
8.23.9 Recommended Placard
Value
|
Ambient Temp DEG C
|
Recommended Prec Front & Rear
|
|
<0
|
28
|
|
10
|
29
|
|
20
|
31
|
|
30
|
32
|
|
40
|
34
|
|
50
|
35
|
|
60
|
37
|
If the vehicle was previously halted for more than 45 min
& is
driven less than 15 min before filling the air then the tires
shall be filled to the respective placard as per the ambient temperature else to
the
next placard value.
Example: if a vehicle was halted at a ambient of 30 deg c for
50
min and driven to a air filling station within 5 min then
respective play cared value will be 32.0 PSI for front & Rear. Else 33.5 PSI.
8.24 PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM
|
8.24.1 Parking Assistance
System
(PAS) – RPAS & FPAS (If equipped)
Parking assistance
system
is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse and in front. While
Parking,
PAS will detect the obstacles at the rear and front side of the vehicle within the
sensing
zone, which cannot be viewed through
the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors and windshield. The PAS
will
then alert the driver by a beep
sound and display about the location of the detected obstacle from the vehicle. The
alert
sound level will vary proportional
to the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the
beeps.
Parking Assistance System
Sensors
|
Front
Sensor Location
|
Rear
Sensor Location
|
|
|
Two PAS sensors are
located
in the rear bumper and two sensors are located in front Bumper to assist driver for
hassle
free
parking
RPAS and FPAS will give proper alerts at vehicle speed less
than
8kmph.
Always keep the sensors
clean
and free from ice formation, dust, water etc. for proper working of the system.
Do not press or shock the
sensors by hitting or using a high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could be
damaged.
Magnetic devices present
in the
detection range could vastly affect the sensor performance and the distance displayed may
not be accurate.
Driving and Operation
| • | PAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances mahindra will accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system |
| • | System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages which are below the ground level |
| • | Repainting of the sensor will affect the performance of the system |
Activation &
De-activation of
PAS
| • | The Vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the Parking assistance system |
| • | RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear engaged and Hand Brake is disengaged |
| • | RPAS will get deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or Hand brake is engaged |
| • | FPAS will be activated automatically when Vehicle speed is in between 1 to 8 kmph and hand brake is dis engaged or clutch is pressed, Hand brake is disengaged and vehicle is standstill or reverse gear is engaged and hand brake is disengaged. |
| • | FPAS will get deactivated when vehicle speed is more than 8kmph or hand brake is engaged or reverse gear is disengaged. |
| • | When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the obstacles, more display bars illuminated & beeps alerts |
8.24.2 PAS (RPAS & FPAS)
Information on Instrument Cluster Screen
|
|
RPAS display on instrument
cluster
screen gives the following information:
| • | Left zone indicates obstacle on left side |
| • | Right zone indicates obstacle on right side |
| • | If Obstacle is in center then left and Right both zone will get highlight.. |
3 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle rear
bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and 3rd
bar alone indicate being distant.
FPAS display on instrument
cluster
screen gives the following information:
| • | Left Corner zone indicates obstacle on left side |
| • | Right Corner Zone indicates obstacle on the right side |
2 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle front
bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and 2nd
bar alone indicate being distant.
8.24.3 Operation of PAS
1. Start the vehicle.
|
|
2. Change the gear to Reverse (engage reverse
gear) and
Dis engage Hand brake. RPAS & FPAS will be displayed in Instrument
Cluster.
|
The RPAS & FPAS both will be displayed in the instrument
cluster
screen during obstacle detection.
|
3. For FPAS alone, disengage Hand brake and drive
the
vehicle forward with speed limit within 1 to 8kmph
|
FPAS will be displayed as like below in the instrument cluster
screen
during obstacle detection.
|
|
4. Display bars in the respective direction will
glow
according to obstacles in its path.
|
|
|
5. The Beep sound can be heard from the Cluster
speaker. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle detected by sensor
is closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of
the
obstacle is near the vehicle.
|
|
6. FPAS warning sound can be disabled using PAS
Switch,
available on IP. PAS switch LED will not glow when FPAS sound is in
active state and will be in ON state when PAS sound deactivated.
|
8.24.4 Pay Attention
|
1. If bars in any one of the sides are displayed
with
‘?’ marks and “Park Assist Fail” is displayed on instrumental cluster
display, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
|
|
2. If all bars are displayed with ‘?’ marks and
“Park
Assist Fail” is displayed on instrumental cluster display, contact an
Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
|
|
|
|
|
3. Obstacle in the blind zone cannot be sensed by
the
system. Applicable for all sensors.
|
|
4. Please check the condition of the obstacle
behind
and in front of your vehicle before moving. In some cases, the display
may be not as same as reality due to the installed sensor level, obstacle shape
and
reflection condition.
|
|
5. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but
A may
not be detected at all. Applicable for all sensors.
|
|
6. Not all obstacles are detected from 120 cm.
For
instance, a person is detected from 75 cm because of the weak reflection
or absorption of the waves of the clothes.
|
|
|
7. The distance indication may move up and down
due to
different sizes of the obstacle at different positions.
|
|
8. Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone,
obstacle
may not be detected since the ultrasonic waves are not reflected back
to the sensor.
|
|
9. The obstacle of a conical shape may not be
detected,
since the ultrasonic waves get reflected away
|
8.24.5 Limitations of PAS
| • | System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small objects which are below the bumper level |
| • | System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface, which will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by PAS |
| • | System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the obstacle |
| • | System may give false alert without obstacles while parking/reversing the vehicle on grasslands, gravels and bumpy roads considering it to be an obstacle |
| • | System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is not fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is overloaded |
| • | System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain ground to a slope terrain and vice versa |
| • | System may give false signal by sensing the ground when the bumper is tilted more from the normal position or when the vehicle is heavily overloaded |
| • | System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow and heavy wind conditions |
| • | The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor
from
detecting it. Some obstacles for example as follows:
|
| • | Depending upon the shape of the obstacle and other environmental factors, the detection distance may shorten or detection may be impossible |
| • | Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor |
| • | Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once |
| • | Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false alarm for e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners and neon lights |
| • | Due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves, the vicinity of the vehicle is noisy. It may cause sensor to give false alarm |
8.24.6 Reverse Parking
Assistance
System (RPAS) – Type 1(if equipped)
Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver
while
parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than
8kmph. While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of the vehicle within
the
sensing zone, which cannot
be viewed through the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors. The RPAS will
then
alert the driver by
a beep sound and display about the location of the detected obstacle. The alert sound level will
vary
proportional to the
distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the beeps.
Activation &
de-activation of
RPAS
| • | The Vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the Parking assistance system |
| • | RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and Hand Brake is disengaged |
| • | RPAS will be deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or Hand brake is engaged. |
| • | When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the obstacles, more display bars illuminated & beeps alerts. |
RPAS display on instrument
cluster
screen gives the following information:
| • | Left zone indicates obstacle on left side |
| • | Right zone indicates obstacle on right side |
| • | If obstacle is in center then right and left both zone will get highlight |
3 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle rear
bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and bar
3rd bar alone being distant.
8.24.6.1 Operation of
RPAS
1. Start the vehicle.
 |
2. Change the gear from neutral to reverse and
disengage the Hand brake for RPAS information on Instrument cluster screen.
The RPAS will be displayed in the instrument
cluster screen during obstacle detection.
|
3. Start moving the vehicle in reverse direction
 |
4. Display bars in the respective direction
will
glow according to obstacles in its path.
|
|
|
5. The Beep sound can be heard from the driver
side
speaker. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer
(crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the
obstacle
is less than 50 cm.
|
8.24.7 Reverse Parking
Assistance
System (RPAS) - Type-2 (if equipped)
Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver
while
parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than
8 kmph. While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of the vehicle within
the
sensing zone, which cannot
be viewed through the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors. The RPAS will
then
alert the driver by
a beep sound about the location of the detected obstacle. The alert sound level will vary
proportional
to the distance. Smaller
the distance shorter the interval between the beeps.
Activation &
de-activation of
RPAS
| • | The Vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the Parking assistance system |
| • | RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and Hand Brake is disengaged |
| • | RPAS will be deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or Hand brake is engaged |
| • | When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system starts giving the alert beeps. Closer the obstacles, higher the frequency of the alert beeps and when obstacle is very near to the vehicle, alert beeps will be continuous |
The frequency of RPAS Alert beeps will increase as the obstacle
comes
closer to the vehicle and when the obstacle comes very
close to the vehicle the alert beeps will become continuous
Operation of RPAS
| 1. | Start the vehicle. |
| 2. | Change the gear from neutral to reverse and disengage the Hand brake for RPAS alert beeps. |
| 3. | Start moving the vehicle in reverse direction. |
| 4. | The alert beeps will become more rapid as the vehicle approaches the obstacle. |
| 5. | The Beep sound can be heard from the driver side speaker. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm. |
Pay Attention:
If Instrument Cluster gives 3 sec continuous beep alert tone whenever reverse gear engaged, Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
If Instrument Cluster gives 3 sec continuous beep alert tone whenever reverse gear engaged, Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
RPAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances will
Mahindra
accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any direct
or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system
8.25 REAR VIEW CAMERA (RVC)(if
equipped)
|
Rear View Camera is located under tail gate
applique.
|
Rear View Camera assists the driver while reversing &
manoeuvring the
Car at lower speeds. It has the following features:
| • | Wider Rear View |
| • | Zoom-In View |
| • | Dynamic Guidelines |
| • | Parking Assistance with Voice and Text Guidance [Parallel & Perpendicular Parking] |
8.25.1 Feature Description
1. Wider Rear View
|
Rear view camera (RVC) provides a wide 130 Deg
Horizontal View and 105 Deg Vertical View.
|
It overcomes limitation of IRVM, where ground is visible only
after a
distance from vehicle rear. Whereas with the RVC, the
ground will be visible right after 15 cm to 30 cm from Vehicle’s Rear
2. Zoom-In View
|
Press Zoom-In button to view objects closer and
press
Zoom-Out button to go back to the normal parking.
|
3. Dynamic Guidelines
|
Dynamic
Guidelines indicate path, the vehicle will traverse with current
steering
position.
|
This will help the driver in adjusting the steering, towards
hitting
any obstacles.
Colour coding on the dynamic lines help in assessing the
distance of
obstacle from the vehicles’ rear. In the RVC Video, if
Red coloured section of Dynamic Line falls on a object, then the Object is within 1 metre
distance
from the vehicle’s rear.
Likewise, Yellow indicates 1-2 mts, Green indicates 2-5 mts.
4. Parking Assistance with
Voice
and Text Guidance
The feature assists the driver for parking the vehicle in target
parking Slot. The feature provides, assistance for Parallel
and Angular parking. It assists driver during parking, through visual overlays as well as voice
and
text guidance.
|
Normal
Parking :
Unless the user select the angle or parallel Parking buttons on
infotainment
then by default, the system will provide Dynamic
guideline for parking assistance to the driver.
|
Angle Parking: Angle
parking assistance guides the driver to park the vehicle in a parking slot perpendicular to the
vehicle. Below are the
steps to achieve Angle parking.
|
1. Choose angle Parking button present on
infotainment
screen.
|
Drive ahead of the parking slot, until it is fully visible. Now
select
angle parking button. After selection, Infotainment
display’s below screen:
2. Setting the steering angle
|
Based on the side user prefers to park, either
blue or
green arc needs to be taken in to consideration Drive the vehicle,
either forward / backward and ensure that preferred side arc’s tip is touching
the
starting edge of target parking slot.
|
Once done stop the vehicle that preferred side arc’s tip is
touching
the starting edge that preferred side arc’s tip is touching
the starting edge that preferred side arc’s tip is touching the starting edge Turn steering
wheel to
the maximum position,
Turn steering wheel to the maximum position, Towards direction of the parking slot. Green/blue
overlay
disappears, and the
dynamic overlay appears on the screen
3. Complete Parking
|
|
Hold steering in the maximum position and start
driving
the vehicle backwards.
|
Once you observe the vehicles’ body, is in parallel to target
parking
slot, bring steering to centre position and continue
driving backward until the whole vehicle is in target parking slot. Parking Completed.
Parallel Parking
Parallel Parking guides the driver to park the vehicle, in a
slot
parallel to the vehicle.
|
1. “Parallel parking” function on infotainment.
Refer
the given image.
|
|
Drive ahead of the parking slot, until the
parking slot
is fully visible. Now select the parallel parking button. After selection,
Infotainment display’s the given screen
|
Setting the steering angle:
|
|
Drive the vehicle Forward or Backward and ensure
the
greenish-blue rectangle [consider right rectangle if parking image slot
is on right side and consider left rectangle if parking slot is on left side], is
placed in the parking slot.
|
Make sure obstacles are not present in the parking slot after
the red
pole. The red pole should match with the front/rear
bumper of the parked vehicle.
|
Ensure, there is enough space(min.3ft)
sideways
between your vehicle and the parked vehicle before engaging reverse.
|
|
Now start turning the steering wheel towards the
direction in which parking slot is present. A shorter rectangle box will
appear which will change the colours according to the steering position.
|
When the box is green, stop turning the steering wheel and hold
the
position.
Green colour:
Represents
suitable parking location. You can try an attempt to park
Red colour:
Represents
unsafe/potential risk parking. Your vehicle may hit the side of the vehicle already parked.
Blue colour:
Represents
unsafe/potential risk parking. Final parking space length needed will be larger than the desired
length of parking
space. May lead to wrong vehicle direction movement.
Green/Blue/Red colours in this mode, are for guiding
the
vehicle to the parking slot and it would not detect the obstacles
or alert the driver in that zone. It is the sole responsibility of the user to
ensure the rear end obstacles/vehicles which
can lead to damage while parking.
3. Complete Parking
|
With current steering position, start moving the
vehicle backward. A green arc line will appear. When the green arc touches
the parking slot end position, stop the vehicle
|
|
|
Now rotate the steering wheel to maximum in the
opposite direction. Arc is then replaced by dynamic parking line. Continue
backing the vehicle with the help of dynamic guideline.
|
When it is observed the vehicles body, is in parallel to target
parking slot, bring steering to centre position. Continue
driving backward until the whole vehicle is in the target parking slot. Parking Completed
4. Voice and Text Guidance during Parking Assistance
| • | To make the parking assistance user-friendly, voice and text guidance is given |
| • | Both Text and Voice guidance can be selected or deselected in the following Path, through Infotainment: |
|
Home ->CarInfo->RVC
|
8.25.2 Screen View Selection
Two views are available –
|
1.
Screen
with buttons
|
2.
Screen
without buttons
|
|
|
|
8.25.3 Entry and Exit
Conditions
Entry Conditions
Whenever you apply the reverse gear, the infotainment will enter
into
‘Rear View Camera Mode’ and displays the video.
You can view reverse video, by selecting Reverse View Camera
Option
present on Infotainment Screen, irrespective of the gear
position.
Below is the path: Home → Car-Info → Rev Camera
You cannot enter RVC Mode, through the infotainment screen
button,
if the vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed exceeds
20 kmph.
Exit Conditions
| • | If the user is not in Parallel or Angular Parking mode and Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’ due to reverse gear, then RVC mode exits, when the driver disengages reverse gear |
| • | If the driver is not in Parallel or Angular Parking mode and Infotainment has entered ‘RVC Mode’, due to Reverse Camera selection present on the Infotainment, then RVC mode can be exited, by selecting the Cancel button appearing on the screen |
| • | Irrespective of RVC entry conditions, when driver is in Parallel or Angular Parking Mode, driver can exit the RVC Mode using Cancel button that appears, whenever driver is in forward gear |
| • | RVC Mode is exited, whenever vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph |
8.25.4 Camera Maintenance
Always keep the Camera lens clean from dust. Presence of dirt on
lens
may lead to poor image quality.
Always use clear water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the
lens.
Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view
camera with a power washer.
| • | In case of any RVC-related issues, the
Infotainment
shall display ‘Contact Service Centre’ and vehicle needs to be taken to
the Service Centre. Avoid using the Rear-View Camera under these
circumstances
|
| • | If rear of your vehicle is damaged or if the Camera position is changed, please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center, for recalibrating the Camera. |
8.25.5 System Limitations
| • | Reverse view camera may not operate normally, when you drive in the extremely high or low temperature area. (Operating temperature: -20°C ~ 65°C) |
| • | Under certain circumstances given below, the rear view camera system will work with limitation or will not function fully: |
- In heavy rain, snow or fog.
- At night or in very dark places.
- If the camera is exposed to very bright light sources.
- Display may flicker, if the camera area is lit by LED or
fluorescent
lighting.
| • | If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas |
| • | If the camera lens got dirty or obstructed |
| • | If the rear of your vehicle got damaged. And if the Camera position and the settings got changed. Please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center |
| • | Camera image reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing. As the display is 2-dimensional, pointed and protruding obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to recognise. Please avoid reverse view camera in the above situation. It could you otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle |
| • | The performance gets affected sometimes due to deposition of ice, dust, heavy rain, heavy wind, heavy exhaust on the camera |
| • | Images shown on the display is a mirror-inverted manner, as like the rearview mirror. Make sure that no persons or animals and any objects/materials are in the manoeuvring area. Pay attention and ensure safety before manoeuvring the car. Driver is legally responsible for their car |
| • | The reverse view camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective & inaccurately |
| • | Avoid using of rear view camera, if you are having eye colour blindness or impaired colour vision |
| • | Objects above the ground or hanged may appear to be far away than they are. But in reality, objects shall be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increase the risk of collision with your car |
| • | It is driver’s responsibility to identify the suitable parking area to park his car safely |
| • | Rear view video is shown, whenever reverse gear is applied, but it cannot be used as a rear view monitoring system, which cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors |
Rear View Camera is only meant to aid the driver and to
enhance
convenience while parking. It does not in any way replace
the driver’s abilities and driving skills while using this system. Under any circumstances,
Mahindra accepts no responsibility
and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage
caused by
this system.
9 STARTING AND DRIVING II
9.1 Steering
Your vehicle is equipped
with
an Electric power steering system (EPS). There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. EPS
uses
energy from the battery to decrease the driver's effort in steering the vehicle. The EPS
system
will give you good vehicle
response and increased ease of manoeuvrability in tight spaces. If for some reason the
power
assist is interrupted, it will
provide mechanical steering capability to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions, you
will
observe a substantial increase
in steering effort.
When
driving in rough/off roads, hold the steering wheel rim, do not hold the wheel spokes.
A
sudden bump can jerk/turn the
wheel and injure your hand. This may also lead to loss of vehicle
control.
The EPS
warning light should only be illuminated with the ignition ON before starting the
engine.
If the
warning light remains illuminated after the engine has been started, there will be no
assistance from power steering.
The vehicle may be driven using the mechanical steering system although it is not
recommended
as the effort to turn the steering
wheel will be significantly high. In this case, contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer
immediately.
Keep
both hands on the steering wheel, with the thumbs resting on the outer wheel
rim.
To
help
prevent damage to the power steering motor:
| • | Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left for more than a few secs. when the engine is running |
If
the
Electric power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned OFF), you can still
steer
the vehicle manually,
but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
| • | Under inflated tyre(s) on any wheel(s) |
| • | Uneven vehicle loading |
| • | High crown in the centre of the road |
| • | High crosswinds |
| • | Wheels out of alignment |
| • | SAS (Steering Angle Sensor) calibration |
| • | Wheels out of balance |
| • | Loose or worn suspension components |
9.1.1 Tilt Steering
|
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both rake
and
reach as required using the lever in the steering shroud under the steering
wheel.
|
|
To tilt/adjust the steering wheel:
|
|
|
1. Pull the tilt lever down to unlock.
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the
desired
position.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
position.
|
4. Push the tilt lever back up to its original position to lock
the
steering.
Improperly locked
steering wheel could cause loss of control and lead to accidents. Never adjust the
steering wheel while
driving.
9.2 Steering Mode Control Switch
|
When pressing the Steering Mode Control switch,
current
steering mode comes on the display.
|
You can change the steering mode in sequence (COMFORT => NORMAL => SPORT) as shown on the right, by
pressing the Steering
Mode Control switch once more within 4 seconds. If the Steering Mode Control
switch is not pressed within 4 seconds, the system will return to the previous mode.
The selected steering mode is still maintained after the ignition
switch
turned OFF and back ON.
EPS (Electronic Power Steering) system is mounted in the
steering
handle. This system includes functions to compensate the
steering power, interlocking with ESP, the supplementary driving safety system, when cornering
or
braking on the road with
different friction. You may feel the difference in steering when these functions are in
operation.
9.2.1 Steering Mode Control
The smart steer system allows adjusting the steering power
according
to driver’s preference or road conditions.
3 levels (COMFORT, NORMAL, SPORT) of steering modes are
available to
select using the Steering Mode Control switch.
COMFORT Mode
COMFORT mode can be selected if you want smoother and more
comfortable
driving than NORMAL mode.
NORMAL Mode
NORMAL mode is used for general driving with normal steering
power.
SPORT Mode
SPORT mode is suitable for sporty driving or while driving on a
high
way.
9.3 Steering Controls - Audio
|
|
The steering wheel also houses switches to control the main audio
functions.
|
A
|
Bluetooth handsfree
|
D
|
Mute
|
|
B
|
Seek up ˄/ Down˅
|
E
|
Volume +
|
|
C
|
Mode
|
F
|
Volume -
|
BLUETOOTH HANDSFREE
Phone switch using Bluetooth handsfree for mobile phone use.
SEEK UP ˄/ DOWN˅
| • | In file play
mode Press the seek switch UP/DOWN: Moves to PREVIOUS/NEXT file of MP3 and video playing |
| • | In radio
mode Press the seek switch UP/DOWN briefly: Manual search, moves to selected channel Press and hold the seek switch UP/DOWN: Auto search |
MODE
Press and hold the mode switch to change the audio mode (AM, FM1,
FM2 and
etc.).
MUTE
Press and hold the MUTE button for more than 2 seconds to
mute/unmute
audio while in TUNER and AUX mode and pause the song
while in CD, USB mode.
VOLUME CONTROL (‘+’ and ‘-’
)
Press ‘+’ and ‘-’ button to increase or decrease the volume
9.4 Cruise Control (if equipped)
Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without the need
to
keep your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be
used for cruising on straight, open highways. Never use it for city driving, inclines, winding
roads,
slippery roads, heavy
rain or in bad weather conditions.
It works on the closed loop system principle to maintain the set
speed of
the vehicle; the system controls the fuel injection
of the engine in order to maintain the set speed.
|
A
|
Cruise ON/OFF
|
C
|
Cruise Set +/-
|
|
B
|
Voice Command
|
D
|
Resume
|
Cruise control enhances your comfort while driving and allows you
to
effortlessly maintain the desired lane speed limit. Improper
use of the cruise control can lead to an accident.
Cruise control is designed
to
operate above a vehicle speed of 35 kmph for all gears except 1st and reverse gears. The
cruise
lamp in the instrument cluster functions only if the cruise control is active.
Cruise control will function
only
under the following conditions:
| • | The vehicle is cruising above 35 kmph |
| • | Engine RPM above 1200 or above 1500 |
| • | Clutch pedal released |
| • | Brake pedal released |
| • | Cruise is activated first time in an ignition cycle by SET + button |
| • | Subsequent cruise engagements can be done by RESUME SET+ buttons in the same ignition cycle |
Cruise control is deactivated
under
the following conditions:
| • | CRUISE OFF button is pressed |
| • | Brake or clutch pedal depressed
If the vehicle speed exceeds the cruise set speed by
30
kmph by accelerator pedal intervention
|
| • | If vehicle speed is increased by 10 kmph for more
than
30 secs. by pressing the accelerator pedal
When Set+/Set- switch is pressed for more than 12
secs.
(In this case, vehicle will not go into cruise mode in that ignition
cycle. In order to restore the cruise function, switch OFF the ignition, wait for 30
secs.
and switch ON the ignition)
Cruise influencing error not indicated by Check
Engine
Lamp, OBD lamp, etc.
|
9.4.1 Cruise Control
Activation
Drive the vehicle to the desired cruising speed (any value
greater
than 35 kmph), press and hold the SET+ button until the
cruise lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates.
If cruise is deactivated (e.g. by depressing brake to handle an
intervention in the road etc.) in current driving cycle, reactivate
the Cruise to the last active Cruise Speed by pressing the RESUME button.
Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up
or
down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control.
This is indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the instrument cluster.
9.4.2 Cruise Control
De-activation
You can cancel cruise control in any of the following ways:
| • | Press the CRUISE OFF button in the steering wheel |
| • | Press the brake pedal |
| • | Gear selector moved into neutral |
| • | HDC or ESP becomes active |
9.4.3 SET + Button
SET + Button is used to activate cruise control and also to
increase
the cruise set speed.
To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET +
Button.
Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by
about 2 kmph. When you wish to continuously increase the cruising speed, press and hold the SET
+
Button and release when
the desired speed is reached.
9.4.4 SET - Button
To decrease the speed in small amounts, press the SET - Button.
Each
time you press, the cruise set speed decreases by about
2 kmph.
When you wish to continuously decrease the cruising speed, press
and
hold the SET- Button. When the desired speed is reached,
release the button.
If switch is pressed for
more
than 12 secs., the switch is assumed to be malfunctioning and the cruise functionality
ceases
to function in that ignition cycle. To resume functionality, ignition has to be
toggled.
The cruise control is a
convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver must
at
all
times remain alert of road / traffic conditions and responsible for the vehicle brake
operation
/ steering control.
Never activate cruise
control
in traffic or when driven in adverse road conditions (heavy rains, windy, slippery
etc.)
9.4.6 RESUME Button
With the help of RESUME, you can opt for the previous set
cruising
speed of the vehicle in the same ignition cycle. This is
best explained with the following example:
| 1. | Assume, you have activated cruise mode and set the vehicle speed at 50 kmph. |
| 2. | Due to an obstacle or a sharp turn, you have deactivated the cruise mode by pressing the brake pedal. |
| 3. | Vehicle comes out of the cruise mode. |
| 4. | When the road condition is suitable to switch over back to cruise control mode, press RESUME button once. The system activates the cruise control mode to the previous cruising speed of 50 kmph. |
| 5. | To resume the previous cruise set speed, the vehicle speed should be above 35 kmph. |
9.4.7 Override Function
This function enables user to ramp up the cruising speed to
overtake
front vehicle.
The cruising speed can be increased by using accelerator pedal.
User
has to complete this action within 30 secs. to maintain
the cruise mode. If user exceeds the 30 secs. limit, cruise mode will be deactivated.
10 EMERGENCIES
10.1 Hazard Switch
The hazard warning flasher button is located in the central bezel
switch
bank. Press the button to turn ON the hazard warning
flashers, all directional turn signals will flash to warn oncoming traffic. This is an emergency
warning
system and should
be used only when there is an emergency. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is a safety
hazard for
other motorists.
Hazard warning flasher will work in both ignition ON and OFF condition and even when the vehicle is
fully
locked.
With extended use, the
hazard
warning flasher may drain your vehicle battery.
10.2 Towing
Front Tow Hook
Tow hook is provided on the front bumper.
Remove the cap, screw in the tow hook and tighten clockwise. Fasten
a
cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing
vehicles to the towing hook.
|
|
10.2.1 Towing Equipment
|
Towing
Options
|
Variant
|
|---|---|
|
2WD
|
|
|
Front Tow hook
|
ü
|
|
Flatbed towing
|
ü
|
|
Towing by all 4 wheels
|
ü
|
|
Sling type towing (front wheel lift)
|
Not recommended
|
Towing equipment are of two types:
| • | Sling-type equipment - The tow truck uses metal cables with hooks on both ends. These hooks go around parts of the frame or suspension and lift the end of the vehicle off the ground. This is not a good method of towing as it may damage the vehicle's suspension and body. Avoid a tow with sling type equipment |
| • | Flat-bed equipment - Your vehicle is loaded on the back of a truck. This is the safest and best way of towing |
10.3 Emergency Assistance
In case of emergencies, driver/customer can follow the below steps
to
connect with our Emergency assistance service either
from the car or through mobile phone.
Emergency Assistance from
Vehicle
e-Call# :
In an unfortunate event of your car meeting with an accident,
triggering
the airbags, your XUV300 will initiate the following
actions -
| 1. | A call will be triggered automatically from your XUV300 to 108* Ambulance Service for medical assistance |
| 2. | Mahindra With You Hamesha team will call you back for support and guidance |
* [108] number is the
default option. This number can be changed based on your preference/location . Contact a
Mahindra
Authorised
Dealer
# This feature is
available
only in cars fitted with telematics unit.
On cars without telematics unit, this function will work if a
mobile
phone is paired through Bluetooth and connected to the
car at the time of the incident.
10.4 Vehicle Does
Not
Start - Checks
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the
correct
starting procedure and that you have sufficient fuel.
If the engine is not
cranking or
is cranking too slowly / intermittently
| 1. | Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean. |
| 2. | If the battery terminals are firmly fastened, switch ON the interior lamps. |
| 3. | If the lamps do not illuminate, glow dim or go OFF when the starter is cranked, then it indicates a weak or discharged battery. Try jumpstarting. Follow ‘jumpstarting’ instructions given later in this chapter. |
| 4. | Check the fuses in the Engine Compartment Fuse Box and Central Fuse Box. |
If the engine cranks
normally, but
does not start
If the lamp illumination is normal, engine is cranking normally,
but
the engine does not start even after repeated cranking,
it needs adjustment or repair. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
To prevent damage to the
starter, do not crank the engine for more than 15 secs. at a time. Wait 10 to 15 secs.
before
trying
again.
If the engine stalls while
driving
Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move
cautiously
off the road to a safe place. Turn ON your hazard warning
flashers and check for any malfunction lamps in the instrument cluster. Turn the ignition OFF,
wait
for approximately 90 secs.
and try starting the engine again. If the vehicle still does not start, contact an Authorised
Mahindra
Dealer.
If the engine stalls
while
running, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be much harder than
usual.
If the engine speed does not
increase
If the engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal
is
depressed, there may be a problem in the Engine Management
System, electrical or electronic controls. In case of certain faults, the engine may go to limp
home
mode, which is indicated
by the check engine lamp. Have your vehicle checked by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer as soon as
possible.
10.5 Vehicle Overheating
If the needle in the
temperature gauge in the instrument cluster is all the way up to the H and/or the high
engine
coolant
temperature warning lamp is ON, your engine has overheated. If the engine is getting
overheated, the Engine Management System
reduces engine power substantially and may even shut the engine OFF; it is dangerous to
continue driving when the engine has
overheated. You need to first cool the engine down before starting to drive
again.
Follow the below
instructions to cool the engine down:
| • | Progressively reduce the vehicle speed and bring the vehicle to a stop at the side of the road |
| • | Turn ON the hazard warning flashers |
| • | Keep the engine running at idle |
| • | Engage the parking brake |
| • | Switch off the air-conditioner |
| • | Wait till the engine coolant temperature drops sufficiently such that the needle in the temperature gauge is around halfway between C and H |
Now switch the engine
OFF
and carefully open the bonnet/hood to visibly inspect the engine cooling system parts.
Be
cautious
while doing an inspection as vehicle parts will still be too hot. Verify that the
engine
coolant level in the coolant recovery
tank is maintained between the 'Min' and 'Max' mark. Check for possible fluid leakages.
Check
for damages to heat exchangers
and connecting hoses. Also verify that the radiator shrouds, engine fan blades and the
engine
belt all are in good condition.
If any evidence of failure is observed, contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for help. In case, no system leakage/ failure is suspected, driving can be continued.
Either due to severe operating conditions or due to any system leakages or failures, the engine can get overheated. However, if the engine is getting overheated repeatedly, even in normal operating conditions, get the vehicle checked by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible.
If any evidence of failure is observed, contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for help. In case, no system leakage/ failure is suspected, driving can be continued.
Either due to severe operating conditions or due to any system leakages or failures, the engine can get overheated. However, if the engine is getting overheated repeatedly, even in normal operating conditions, get the vehicle checked by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to the 'High
Engine Coolant Temperature' section under the 'Instrument cluster features’ chapter
for
details.
If the high engine
coolant temperature warning is ignored, the engine shuts OFF abruptly to safeguard
engine
components from
overheating and consequent failure. Abrupt engine shut-off can lead to
uncontrollable
driving condition and accidents.
Stay clear of hot
and
rotating vehicle parts while visually inspecting the vehicle. The coolant inside the
cooling system
is under high pressure and temperature. Never open the pressure cap of the degassing
tank
when the engine is hot. Not taking
precautions may lead to serious injury to your skin/eyes.
For optimum
performance
of the cooling system, you must maintain the required coolant level and use only
recommended engine
coolant.
10.6 Jump Starting
If your vehicle's battery has run down, you may be able to start
the
engine by using a standalone booster battery.
But before going ahead with this procedure ensure that the
battery is
the cause of vehicle not starting. To confirm this,
few simple tests can be conducted as follows;
| • | Check the headlights - Are they dim or bright? If they are dim, it's likely your battery is dead. If your headlights are bright, you do not have a dead battery and a jump start may not help |
| • | Try to start your vehicle -Does it turn over very slowly, or does it crank quickly? If it cranks quickly, you do not have a dead battery and a jump start may not help. If it cranks slowly, or not at all, you probably have a dead battery |
Open the bonnet and locate the battery (near the left side
fender).
Identify the positive and negative terminals.
| • | The positive terminal will be marked with a plus sign (+) and will usually have a RED cable attached on it. |
| • | The negative terminal will be marked with a minus sign (-) and will usually have a BLACK cable attached to it |
Check the physical condition of the battery. Inspect batteries
for
cracks, leaks or any other damage. If you find any of these
things, do not jump start the vehicle. Call Mahindra Road Side Assistance or replace the
battery. If
the weather is very cold,
remove the refill caps and check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or like
ice, do
not attempt jump-starting
until it thaws.
| 1. | Wear safety gear (goggles or face guard and
gloves)
if you have it.
It may
be
necessary to remove the disabled vehicle’s battery cables from the
battery
terminals and clean both cables and terminals.
Use a stiff wire brush to remove all corrosion. Reconnect the cables to
the
battery terminals and jump the vehicle.
|
| 2. | Untangle and unwind your jumper cables. Like your batteries, your jumper cables will probably have red and black cables and will have heavy duty clamps to connect to the battery terminals. You must make sure that the red and black ends of your jumper cables never touch each other once they are connected to the batteries; permitting them to do so can result in serious arcing and/or damage to vehicle |
| 3. | Connect the jumper cables in the order
described
below;
Make
sure
none of the cables are dangling into the engine compartment, where they
could
be exposed to moving parts.
|
| 4. | Remove the jumper cables once the vehicle
starts. Do
this in the reverse of the order in which they were attached, and don't
let any of the cables or clamps touch each other (or dangle into the engine
compartment)
Replace any positive (+) red post protective
covers if
applicable (You have had to remove or open these in the beginning)
These covers help prevent accidental short circuiting of the battery
|
| 5. | Keep the recently-disabled vehicle's engine running. Run the vehicle above idle (slightly revved up with your foot on the accelerator). This should give the battery enough charge to start the vehicle again. If it does not, you probably have a dead battery or a dying alternator |
Improper jump starting
procedures can result in battery explosion and acid burn hazard.
Loosely connected battery
cables could damage the electronic control units.
To disconnect battery
terminals
wait for at least 2 minutes to allow discharge of high voltage or it could lead to
personal
injury.
While disconnecting,
always
disconnect the -VE terminal first and while connecting, always connect the -VE terminal
last.
Do not connect battery
terminals with opposite polarity, it will lead to alternator failure
Towing a vehicle to start
could
be dangerous. The vehicle being towed could surge forward when the engine starts, causing
the tow vehicles to collide, injuring the occupants.
Modern vehicles with
electronic
management systems should not be jump started without ‘protected’ jump starter
leads.
10.7 Limp Home Mode
Limp Home Mode is an
emergency situation declared by the EMS (Engine Management System) due to failure of
one/more
critical
sensors/actuators. In this mode, the EMS (Engine Management System) will revert back to
basic
minimum requirement (fuel quantity/injection
timings) to aid the driver to bring the vehicle back to the nearest workshop. Needless
to
say, the drivability & fuel consumption
will be greatly affected.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or if there is a drop in vehicle performance, there might be a malfunction in the engine management system which triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode. This condition is accompanied by the check engine lamp illuminating in the instrument cluster. In this mode, the vehicle speed is limited and the accelerator pedal may not function normally. It is recommended you contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately for assistance.
If vehicle acceleration worsens or if there is a drop in vehicle performance, there might be a malfunction in the engine management system which triggers/activates the Limp Home Mode. This condition is accompanied by the check engine lamp illuminating in the instrument cluster. In this mode, the vehicle speed is limited and the accelerator pedal may not function normally. It is recommended you contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately for assistance.
10.8 Fuses & Relays
A fuse is the most common electric protection device. A fuse is
placed in
an electrical circuit, so that when current flow
exceeds the rating of the fuse, it blows off.
The element in the fuse melts, opening the circuit and preventing
other
components of the circuit from being damaged by the
over current. The size of the metal fuse element determines the rating. Once a fuse blows off, it
must be
replaced with a
new one.
Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment OFF before
touching or
attempting to change a fuse.
The replacement fuse rating
should
be the same as the one you are replacing.
You can identify a blown
fuse by a
break in the filament. All fuses except high current fuses are push fit. A fuse puller
should be used to remove the fuse from its position.
|
|
Fuse puller is available at the
engine compartment fuse box.
10.8.1 Engine Compartment
Fuse Box
Engine compartment fuse box is located adjacent to vehicle
battery.
|
|
To open the fuse box cover, press the lock and push the cover
back and
lift it.
Spare fuses are provided in the fuse box for replacement of
blown
fuses. Ensure the correct rating fuse is replaced with the
blown fuse.
Fuse Layout :
|
FUSE
NO.
|
CIRCUIT
|
FUSE
RATING
|
|---|---|---|
|
F1*
|
INJECTOR / FMU & HFM
|
15A
|
|
F2*
|
VVT – IN & OUT VOP
|
10A
|
|
F3*
|
IGN COIL
|
20A
|
|
F4
|
FUEL PUMP
|
20A
|
|
F5*
|
ECU
|
10A
|
|
F6
|
Horn
|
20A
|
|
F7
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F8
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F9*
|
GNS / INTER COOLER FAN
|
10A
|
|
F 10
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F11
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F12
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F13
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F14
|
COOLING FAN
|
40A
|
|
F15*
|
PRE GLOW
|
60A
|
|
F16
|
POWER WINDOW
|
40A
|
|
F17
|
BATTERY +VE I
|
50A
|
|
F18
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F19
|
IGN I
|
40A
|
|
F 20
|
MAIN
|
30A
|
|
F21
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F22
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F23
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F24
|
ABS 2
|
30A
|
|
F25
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F26
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F27*
|
DRL
|
10A
|
|
F28
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F29
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F30
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F31*
|
TCU
|
15A
|
|
F32
|
AC COMP
|
10A
|
|
F33
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F34
|
Spare
|
–
|
|
F35
|
SCR
|
15A
|
|
F36*
|
BMS
|
5A
|
|
F37
|
BLOWER
|
40A
|
|
F38
|
ABS –I
|
50A
|
|
F39
|
MBFM-1
|
60A
|
|
F40
|
BATT +VE 2
|
50A
|
|
F41
|
MBFM-2
|
60A
|
|
F42
|
STARTER ACCESSORY
|
40A
|
|
F43*
|
AMT
|
30A
|
|
F44*
|
OIL PUMP & PISTON JET
|
10A
|
|
F45*
|
WGV & DUMP*
EGR/WP@ |
10A*
15A@ |
|
F46
|
STOP LAMP SW
|
10A
|
|
F47*
|
AC PRESSURE SW
|
10A
|
|
F48*
|
LSF/NOX
|
10A
|
|
F49
|
ALT +
|
150A
|
|
F50
|
EPS
|
80A
|
|
F51
|
BAT +
|
–
|
|
*– Based on Applicability
|
||
|
RELAY
NO.
|
CIRCUIT
|
|---|---|
|
R1
|
Spare
|
|
R2
|
Spare
|
|
R3
|
Spare
|
|
R4*
|
PRE GLOW
|
|
R5
|
Spare
|
|
R6
|
Spare
|
|
R7
|
Spare
|
|
R8
|
Spare
|
|
R9
|
AC OMPRESSOR
|
|
R10
|
Spare
|
|
R11
|
Spare
|
|
R12*
|
GNS/INTER COOLER FAN
|
|
R13
|
Spare
|
|
R14
|
MAIN
|
|
R15
|
BLOWER
|
|
R16*
|
ACCESSORY
|
|
R17
|
Spare
|
|
R18
|
COOLING FAN HIGH
|
|
R19
|
COOLING FAN LOW
|
|
R20
|
STARTER
|
|
R21
|
Spare
|
|
R22
|
Spare
|
|
R23*
|
SCR
|
|
R24
|
Spare
|
|
R25
|
Spare
|
|
R26
|
HORN
|
|
R27
|
FUEL PUMP
|
|
*– Based on Applicability
|
|
10.8.2 Instrument Panel Fuse
Box
This fuse box is located below the Instrument panel on the
driver
side. To access the fuse box, pull out the top panel as
shown in the image.
Fuse Layout :
|
FS
NO.
|
CIRCUIT
|
FUSE
RATING
|
|---|---|---|
|
FS1
|
MBFM-1
|
25A
|
|
FS4
|
ESCL
|
5A
|
|
FS5
|
ROOM LAMP
|
5A
|
|
FS6
|
REVERSE LAMP
|
10A
|
|
FS7
|
CLUSTER EPS, PKE, IMMO
|
10A
|
|
FS8
|
SPARE
|
10A
|
|
FS9
|
MBFM
|
10A
|
|
FS10*
|
PKE
|
5A
|
|
FS11, FS12 & FS13
|
-
|
-
|
|
FS14
|
P/OUTLET
|
30A
|
|
FS15**
|
AMT.TCU
|
10A
|
|
FS16
|
AUDIO-
|
10A
|
|
FS17
|
LOWER MAIN SW
|
10A
|
|
FS18
|
INSIDE MIRROR
|
10A
|
|
FS19
|
AIRBAG.PAB OFF SW
|
10A
|
|
FS20
|
AUDIO, REAR CAMERA
|
10A
|
|
FS23
|
MBFM — 5
|
30A
|
|
FS24
|
MBFM – 4
|
30A
|
|
FS25
|
SPARE
|
15A
|
|
FS26
|
HVAC
|
10A
|
|
FS27
|
PKE, SUNROOF SW-
|
5A
|
|
FS28
|
SUNROOF MOTOR
|
20A
|
|
FS29*
|
PKE
|
15A
|
|
FS30
|
DIAGNOSTIC. IMMO-
|
10A
|
|
FS31
|
||
|
FS32
|
SPARE
|
10A
|
|
FS33
|
SPARE
|
20A
|
|
FS34
|
SPARE
|
10A
|
|
FS35
|
OUTSIDE MIRROR
|
10A
|
|
FS36
|
START
|
10A
|
|
FS37
|
ABS
|
10A
|
|
FS38
|
EMS ECU
|
10
|
|
FS39
|
SPARE
|
10A
|
|
FS40
|
BLOWER RLY COIL
|
40A
|
|
FS41
|
||
|
FS42
|
POWER WINDOW LH
|
25A
|
|
FS43
|
SPARE
|
15A
|
|
FS44
|
POWER WINDOW RH
|
25A
|
|
* — For PKE Variant, ** —For AMT Variant
|
||
|
Memory
Fuse
|
||
|---|---|---|
|
PF
NO.
|
CIRCUIT
|
FUSE
RATING
|
|
FS2
|
AUDIO
|
15A
|
|
FS3
|
CLUSTER HVAC
|
10A
|
|
FS21
|
MBFM — 3
|
30A
|
|
FS22
|
MBFM — 2
|
30A
|
10.9 Changing a Flat Tyre
In case of a flat tyre during driving, reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road
to a safe place well away from traffic. Park on a level spot with firm ground. Stop the vehicle and
turn
ON your hazard warning
flashers.
Firmly apply the parking brake. Have everyone come out of the
vehicle on
the side away from traffic.
Never stop your vehicle in a
traffic lane to change a tyre. You could be hit by an oncoming vehicle. Keep driving until
you
reach a safe location.
Lifting a vehicle to change a tyre or perform maintenance is very
dangerous if you do not have the requisite tools, safety
equipment and training. The jack provided along with the vehicle is to be used only for changing a
spare
tyre. It is never
to be used to perform any other maintenance or repair on the vehicle.
Never place any part of your
body
under any portion of the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. You could be crushed
by the vehicle if it falls off a jack. Keep bystanders away from the vehicle.
Find level, solid ground
that
is clear of oncoming traffic. If you cannot find a safe place to stop, it is better to
drive
on a flat tyre and damage the rim than it is to risk being hit by oncoming traffic. After
changing a flat Tyre, never store
the tyre or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. This loose
equipment
could strike an occupant in
the event of a sudden stop or collision. Store all of these items in the proper
place.
The following sections outline
the
procedure for changing a flat tyre;
10.9.1 Warning Triangle
The warning triangle is a necessary device for your safety.
It is placed in the luggage compartment below the luggage floor
lid.
When you pull over your breaking down vehicle to a safe place,
set up
a warning triangle behind your vehicle. (Daytime: 100
Metres behind, Night: 200 Metres behind)
When the Vehicle has a
Serious
Problem during Driving
Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of traffic
to a
safe place.
Set up the warning triangle behind your vehicle (Daytime: 100
Metres,
Night: 200 Metres) to warn other vehicles
Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away from
the
traffic.
When your safety is secured, contact your Authorised Mahindra
dealer
for your emergency service
10.9.2 Tool Kit
The jack, Screwdriver(+and-), Jack operating Lever, Tow bar, Deo
Spanner(10mmx12mm) and Wheel Spanner are placed in the tool
kit organiser above the spare wheel.
|
A
|
Jack
|
|
B
|
Screwdriver (+ and -)
|
|
C
|
Jack Operating Lever
|
|
D
|
Tow Bar
|
|
E
|
Deo Spanner 10mm X 12mm
|
|
F
|
Wheel Spanner
|
Jack is located on the tool kit organiser above the spare wheel.
To
remove the jack out, follow the process below:
| • | Lift and take out the Luggage floor Lid as
shown in
the illustration
|
| • | Lift and take out the tool kit organiser from
the
spare wheel
|
| • | Take the jack out from the tool kit organiser |
10.9.3 Spare Wheel Removal
The spare wheel is mounted below the luggage compartment at the
rear
end of the vehicle
|
|
||||||
|
|
Follow the reverse procedure
to
re–locate the flat tyre to the spare wheel bracket.
The spare tyre is only for emergency situations. Never use it
for
normal driving. After installing the spare tyre on a wheel,
take your vehicle to a Mahindra Authorised Service Centre or a tyre-specialised shop to
replace it
with a new regular tyre.
| • | When reinstalling the spare tyre, be sure to securely lock it with lock nut. |
| • | While your vehicle is being raised up with a jack, avoid any impact on your vehicle. Otherwise, you may get injured |
| • | When taking out the spare tyre, be careful not to damage the body of your vehicle |
Luggage Floor Lid to be fitted always at the lower position
when
removes and refits again.
10.9.4 Wheel Bolt Loosening
Wheel cover Removal (if
equipped)
Wrap the tip of a screw driver with cloth, insert it near the
lugs of
the wheel cover and pry the cap away from the wheel.
Do not try to pry off the
wheel
cover by hand alone. Take due care in handling the wheel cover to avoid unexpected
personal
injury.
Always loosen the wheel bolts before raising the vehicle. Turn
the
wheel bolts counter clockwise to loosen as per the crisscross
sequence shown. To get maximum leverage, fit the spanner to the bolt, so that the handle is on
the
left side. Grab the spanner
near the end of the handle and push down on the handle. Be careful that the spanner does not
slip off
the bolt. Do not remove
the bolts, but loosen them by one or two turns.
Do not apply force with
your
legs (or stand) on the wheel spanner while loosening/tightening the wheel bolts.
10.9.5 Jack Points
Front jack up point -
On
the side sill in-between the groove available on the sill cladding just behind the front wheels.
Rear jack up point -
On the
side sill in-between the groove available on the sill cladding just in front of the rear wheels.
Make sure to instal the jack so that its upper plate is
correctly
seated under the vehicle’s positions marked in the figure
for the flat tyre side.
10.9.6 Jacking
Position the jack at the correct jacking point. Make sure the
jack is
positioned on a level and solid ground. Ensure no one
is in the vehicle.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre to keep the
vehicle
from rolling when it is jacked up. When blocking the
wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.
|
A : Flat Tyre
B : Chock Blocks
|
||
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle end along with the
wheel
spanner into the jack and turn it clockwise with the
jack handle. As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, check that it is properly
positioned.
Raise it high enough
so that the spare tyre can be installed. Remember, you will need more ground clearance when
putting on
the spare tyre than
when removing the flat tyre.
Make sure to set the jack
properly in the jacking point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned jack will
damage
the underbody of the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause
personal
injury.
| • | Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing |
| • | Do not raise the jack with someone in the vehicle |
| • | When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top or underneath the jack |
| • | Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the wheel |
| • | Usable extended height of jack is up to the yellow line/mark provided in the jack. Do not raise the jack above the yellow line |
| • | Follow jacking instructions |
| • | Do not start or run the vehicle while your vehicle is supported by the jack |
Never get under the
vehicle
when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.
Remove the wheel bolts. Lift the flat tyre straight off and
place it
aside. Roll the spare wheel into position and align the
holes in the wheel with the holes on the hub. Lift up the wheel and get at least the top bolt
aligned
through its hole. Wiggle
the wheel and fix the other bolts.
Re-instal the wheel bolts inward and tighten by hand. Press the
wheel
inward and tighten the wheel bolts further.
Never use oil or grease
on the
bolts . Doing so may lead to over tightening of the bolts, wheel nut spanner slip, damage
the
bolts and also may cause personal injuries. Also, bolts may loosen and the wheels may fall
off,
which could cause a serious
accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt, clean before installing.
Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the diagonally opposite
wheel
bolts using the wheel nut spanner. Turn the jack handle
extension counter clockwise using the jack handle to lower the vehicle, making sure the handle
remains
firmly fitted onto
the jack handle extension. Make sure the wheel spanner is securely engaged over the bolt.
Tighten each
bolt a little at a
time in the diagonally opposite order as shown. Repeat the process until all the bolts are
tight. Do
not use other tools or
any additional leverage other than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.
Improperly or loosely
tightened
wheel bolts are dangerous. The wheel could wobble or come off. This could result in loss
of
vehicle control and cause a serious accident. Always make sure all the wheel bolts are
properly/securely tightened to the
specified torque.
When lowering the
vehicle, make
sure all portions of your body are clear off the vehicle as it is lowered to the ground.
Have
the wheel bolts tightened with the torque spanner to 120 Nm, as soon as possible after
changing
wheels.
If you have rotated,
repaired,
changed your tyres or changed the wheel rims, check the wheel bolts are still tight after
driving
about 1,000 km (Torque 120 Nm).
Put the wheel cap (if equipped) into position aligning the
nozzle on
the wheel to the nozzle clearance on the wheel cover.
Tap it firmly on the sides with your hand to snap it into place.
Check the air pressure of the replaced tyre. If the pressure is
lower
than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service
station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct.
Always
reinstall the valve
cap after checking or adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is not replaced, dirt and moisture
could get
into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and instal it as soon as possible.
10.9.7 Restore the Tools,
Jack
and Flat Tyre Securely
|
Mount the flat tyre to the spare wheel bracket at
the
luggage compartment and firmly tighten the securing bolts. Restore the
tools and jack back to their respective locations.
|
The wheel balance and
alignment
differ from wheel to wheel which may lead to difference in steering and braking. It is
recommended
to fix the flat tyre at the nearest tyre shop and swap the spare wheel back.
Wheel balancing and Wheel Alignment to be done after tyre
puncture
rework.
Steering centering
calibration
(Steering Angle Sensor) to be performed if you have done Wheel Alignment, repaired,
changed
your tyres or changed the wheel rims. Contact an Authorised
Mahindra Dealer for assistance.
11 MAINTENANCE
11.1 Dimensions
|
Dimensions
|
mm
|
|---|---|
|
Wheel Base
|
2600
|
|
Overall Length
|
3995
|
|
Overall Width
|
1821
|
|
Overall Height
|
1627
|
|
Track Width (Front)
|
1550
|
|
Track Width (Rear)
|
1563
|
Front View
Rear View
Side View
11.2 Technical Specifications
|
Technical
Specifications
|
|||
|---|---|---|---|
|
Diesel
|
TCMPFI
|
TGDI
|
|
|
ENGINE
|
D15 1.5 Litre
|
G12 1.2 LitreI
|
G12 1.2 LitreI
|
|
Displacement/Cubic Capacity
|
1497 cc
|
1197 cc
|
1197 cc
|
|
Type
|
Transverse
|
Transverse
|
Transverse
|
|
Compression Ratio
|
16.0:1
|
10 (+/- 0.5):1
|
11 (+/- 0.5):1
|
|
Max. Engine output, (kW @ RPM)
|
85.8 kW @ 3750 rpm
|
82 kW (+/- 2 %) @ 5000 rpm
|
96 kW (+/- 2 %)@ 5000 rpm
|
|
Max. Torque (Nm @ RPM)
|
300 Nm @ 1500 - 2500 rpm
|
200 Nm @ 1500 - 3500 rpm
|
230 Nm @ 1500 - 3750 rpm
|
|
TRANSMISSION
|
|||
|
Type
|
Manual Transmission (MT) (or) Automated
Manual
Transmission (AMT)
|
||
|
No. of Gears
|
6 Forward, 1 Reverse
|
||
|
STEERING
|
|||
|
Type/Description
|
Electronic Power Steering (EPS)
|
||
|
BRAKES
|
|||
|
Service Brake
|
Hydraulic Circuit Assisted by Vacuum
Booster
cross diagonal circuit with ABS
|
||
|
Front
|
Disc
|
||
|
Rear
|
Disc/Drum (if equipped)
|
||
|
Parking Brake
|
Mechanical-Hand Operated
|
||
|
WHEELS
&
TYRES
|
|||
|
Rim
|
6J x 16 (or) 6.5J x 17
|
||
|
Tyres
|
Regular
P205/65 R16 95 H (or) P215/55 R17 94 H
Spare Wheel - T135/90, R16 |
||
|
Type
|
Radial Tubeless
|
||
|
Laden Tyre Pressure
Front & Rear |
32 Psi (for R16 tyre)
34 Psi (for R17 tyre) |
||
|
FUEL
|
|||
|
Fuel Capacity
|
42 Litres
|
||
|
DEF Tank Capacity
|
20 liters
|
NA
|
NA
|
|
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
|
|||
|
System Voltage
|
12V
|
||
|
Battery
|
60Ah / 50Ah
|
||
11.3 Bulb Specification
|
Lamp
Bulb
|
Wattage
|
Bulb
Type
|
No. of
Bulbs
per Vehicle
|
|---|---|---|---|
|
Headlamp – High beam
|
H1 55W
|
12V 55W
|
2
|
|
Headlamp – Low beam
|
H7 55W
|
12V 55W
|
2
|
|
Headlamp Low version High/Low beam
|
H4 55/60W
|
12V 55/60W
|
2
|
|
Front position lamp - High version
|
LEDs
|
||
|
Front position lamp - Low version
|
W5W
|
12V 5W
|
2
|
|
Turn signal lamp – Front
|
P21W
|
12V 21W
|
2
|
|
Front Fog lamp
|
H16 19W
|
12V 19W
|
2
|
|
Side Turn signal lamp
|
WY5W
|
12V 5W
|
2
|
|
Stop lamp
|
LEDs
|
||
|
Rear position lamp
|
LEDs
|
||
|
Turn signal lamp – Rear
|
WY16W
|
12V 16W
|
2
|
|
Reverse lamp
|
W16W
|
12V 16W
|
2
|
|
Rear Fog lamp
|
P21W
|
12V 21W
|
2
|
11.4 General
Owner's
Information
Your vehicle has been designed for fewer maintenance
requirements with
longer service intervals to save both your time and
money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day-to-day care is more important to ensure
a
smooth, trouble-free, safe
and economical operation. It is the owner's responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance,
including general maintenance
service is performed. Note that both the new vehicle limited warranty and emission control
system
limited warranties specify
that proper maintenance and care must be performed. See Warranty and Service Information Guide
for
complete warranty information.
Where to go for
service?
Mahindra technicians are well trained specialists and are kept
up to
date with the latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips and in dealership training programmes. They learn to work on Mahindra
vehicles
before they work on
your vehicle, rather than while they are working on it.
You can be confident that your Mahindra Authorised Dealer
service
department does the best job to meet the maintenance requirements
on your vehicle reliably and economically.
Get the most from your vehicle with routine maintenance:
Routine maintenance is the best way to help ensure you get
the
performance, dependability, long life and better resale value
you expect from your vehicle. This is exactly why we've put together this Maintenance Section.
It
outlines the services required
to properly maintain your vehicle and when they should be performed. The focus is on maintaining
your
vehicle while it's running
great, which goes a long way toward preventing major repairs and expenses later.
Here are a few suggestions to help you get started on routine
maintenance:
| • | Familiarize yourself with your vehicle by going through your Owner's Manual |
| • | Take a few minutes to review this Maintenance Section |
| • | Make it a habit to use this manual to record scheduled maintenance in the warranty and Service Information Guide |
| • | Consult with your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all your vehicle's needs |
Suggestions for Obtaining
Service
for your Vehicle
Prepare for the
Appointment: If you have warranty work to be done, be sure to have the right papers
with
you. All work to be performed may not be covered
by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of
your
vehicle's service history.
Prepare a List: Make
a
written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident
or work done
that is not on your maintenance log, let the Service adviser/Relationship manager know about it.
Be Reasonable with Requests:
If your list has several items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day,
discuss
the situation with the Service
adviser/Relationship manager and list the items in order of priority.
Need Assistance? :
It is
recommended talking to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer service manager first. Most matters can be
resolved with this
process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of
the
dealership.
If an Mahindra Authorised Dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you
may contact any Mahindra Customer Care Executive. They
would need the following information:
Owner's name and address, owner's telephone number (home and
office),
Mahindra Authorised Dealer name, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), vehicle delivery date and mileage.
Warranty Information:
Read
the Warranty Information given in the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’ for the terms and
provisions of Mahindra
warranties applicable to this vehicle. Mahindra genuine parts, fluids, lubricants and
accessories are
available at any Mahindra
Authorised Dealer. They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
Protect your Warranty:
Routine maintenance is not only the best way to help keep your vehicle performing as
intended,
it's also the best way to protect
your warranty. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance specified in the warranty and Service
Information Guide will invalidate
warranty coverage on parts affected by the lack of maintenance. We can't stress enough how
important
it is to keep records
of all maintenance. Damage or failures due to neglect or lack of proper maintenance are not
covered
under warranty.
Keeping maintenance records is easy with the ‘Warranty and
Service
Information Guide’
It's important to document the maintenance of your vehicle. For
your
convenience to maintain records of service, the scheduled
maintenance coupons are provided in the service coupon booklet. Every time you bring your
vehicle in
for scheduled maintenance,
be sure to present this booklet and certify the work. Also record the date of service and
mileage at
the time of service.
This will make record keeping easy and, should your vehicle ever require warranty coverage, you
will
have all the documentation
to show you've properly maintained it.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing:
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal
operating characteristic by itself, and does not necessarily indicate a concern
or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs
of
overheating and/or foreign material
contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory
trained technicians at your Mahindra
Authorised Dealer. Your vehicle's oils and fluids should be changed at the specified
intervals or in conjunction with a repair.
Chemicals and Additives:
Non-Mahindra approved chemicals or additives are not
required for factory recommended maintenance. In fact, Mahindra recommends
against the use of such additive products unless specifically recommended by Mahindra
for a
particular application.
Your vehicle is very
sophisticated and built with multiple complex performance systems. Every manufacturer
develops these
systems using different specifications and performance features. That's why it's
important to
rely on your Mahindra Authorised
Dealer to properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
When planning your
maintenance services, consider your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all your vehicle's
needs.
Get the most from your
Service and
Maintenance visits: Getting your vehicle
serviced
at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer adds great value to your vehicle in number of ways.
Hence,
it is recommended to service your vehicle at an Mahindra Authorised Dealer
only.
Maintenance Interval:
Mahindra establishes recommended maintenance
intervals based upon engineering testing to determine the most appropriate mileage
to perform the various maintenance services. This protects your vehicle at the lowest
overall
cost to you. Mahindra recommends
that you do not deviate from the maintenance schedules presented in this Maintenance
Schedule.
Vehicle Self Maintenance -
General
Precautions
| • | Refer to relevant sections of the manual before starting |
| • | Set the parking brake |
| • | Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly |
| • | Turn OFF the engine and remove the key |
| • | Stay clear of hot vehicle parts |
| • | Avoid repeated contact with fluids |
| • | Do not let fuel, coolant and other fluids spill over electrical and hot vehicle parts |
| • | Keep all open flames and other burning material like cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel-related parts |
Do not start/run the
engine
when any engine/peripheral parts are removed.
11.5 Engine Compartment
Diesel
|
A
|
Front Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
|
D
|
Brake Fluid Reservoir
|
G
|
Battery
|
|
B
|
Degassing Tank
|
E
|
Engine Oil Cap
|
H
|
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
|
|
C
|
Dipstick
|
F
|
Air Filter
|
Petrol
|
A
|
Front Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
|
D
|
Brake Fluid Reservoir
|
G
|
Battery
|
|
B
|
Degassing Tank
|
E
|
Dipstick
|
H
|
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
|
|
C
|
Engine Oil Cap
|
F
|
Air Filter
|
11.6 General Maintenance
Exercise extreme
caution
when the hood is open and engine is ON.
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed frequently. In addition to checking the items listed below, if you notice any unusual noise, fluid leakages, smell or vibration, you should investigate the cause or take your vehicle to your Authorised Mahindra Dealer or a qualified service shop immediately.
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed frequently. In addition to checking the items listed below, if you notice any unusual noise, fluid leakages, smell or vibration, you should investigate the cause or take your vehicle to your Authorised Mahindra Dealer or a qualified service shop immediately.
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you
intend
to run the engine.
In the Engine
Compartment
| • | Front windshield washer fluid level |
| • | Engine coolant level |
| • | Battery condition |
| • | Brake/Clutch fluid level |
| • | Engine oil level |
| • | Fluid leaks |
| • | Hoses, joints and pipes for any abnormalities |
Inside the Vehicle
| • | Lights |
| • | Warning lamps |
| • | Windshield wipe and wash |
| • | Steering wheel |
| • | Seats |
| • | Seat belts |
| • | Accelerator pedal |
| • | Brake pedal |
| • | Brakes |
| • | Parking brake |
| • | Gear lever shift mechanism |
Outside the Vehicle
| • | Lamps |
| • | Fluid leaks |
| • | Doors and engine hood latches |
| • | Tyre inflation pressure |
| • | Tyre surface/thread and wheel nuts |
11.7 In the Engine Compartment
11.7.1 Fluid Leaks
Check the engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle
for any
leaks. If you smell fuel vapour or notice any leak,
have the cause found and corrected immediately.
11.7.2 Engine Oil
Engine oil has the primary functions of lubricating and cooling
the
inside of the engine. It plays a major role in maintaining
the engine in proper working order. Therefore, it is essential to check the engine oil
regularly.
11.7.3 Engine Oil Consumption
It is normal for engines to consume some engine oil during
operation.
Causes of consumption in a normal engine are as follows:
| • | Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders. Thin films of oil, left over when pistons move in cylinders, are sucked into the combustion chamber due to high negative pressure generated when the vehicle is decelerating. This oil gets burnt in the combustion chamber |
| • | Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of intake valves. Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber together with the intake air and is burnt there |
| • | Engine oil consumption depends on the operating conditions in which the vehicle is driven. Oil consumption will be more due to high speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A new engine may consume more oil since its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls are not conditioned |
11.7.4 Checking/Topping the
Engine
Oil
| • | Make sure the vehicle is on level ground |
| • | Turn the engine OFF and wait a few minutes for the oil to settle down into the oil sump |
| • | Apply the parking brake |
| • | Open the hood, use stay rod to support the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat |
| • | Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick |
| • | Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again |
| • | If the oil level is between “Min” and “Max” marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL |
| • | If the oil level is below or near the “Min”
mark, add
enough oil through the oil filler cap to raise the level within the
“Min” and “Max” marks. Wait for few minutes after every top-up for the oil to
settle
down before checking the level
|
| • | Oil levels above the “Max” mark may cause engine damage/poor performance |
| • | Put the dipstick and the oil filler cap back
and
ensure it is fully/properly seated
|
To avoid possible oil
loss and
injury due to hot blow-by gas, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level
dipstick
and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Draining/Changing of
engine oil
should always be done by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
11.7.5 Checking/Topping
Engine
Coolant Level
| • | Park the vehicle on flat-horizontal surface. Keep the parking brake fully engaged. Shut-off the engine |
| • | Wait till the engine cools down and hence coolant temperature comes down to normal room temperature |
|
|
| • | In case the coolant level is below the "MIN" marking, the coolant should be topped-up |
| • | The coolant should be filled till the level rises above the 'MIN' but remain below the “MAX” marking on the degassing tank |
| • | However, if the degassing tank is found to be near empty, it is recommended that the system be checked at Mahindra Authorised Dealer |
Kindly refer the Warranty
and
Service Information Guide for Engine Coolant capacity and grade.
Top-up only with
recommended
Ready To Use (RTU) coolants for ensuring performance, anti-freezing and corrosion
protection.
Do not add water directly. Mixing with other brand of coolants is not recommended and
should be
avoided.
Draining or changing of
engine
coolant should always be done by Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
Never open the pressure
cap
when the engine is hot. Hot coolant may splash resulting in serious personal injury or
severe
burns by the erupting liquid.
11.7.6 Checking/Topping
Brake/Clutch Fluid
The brake and clutch systems are supplied fluid from the same
reservoir (Applicable for manual transmission vehicle).
|
The brake fluid level will drop slowly as the
brakes
wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced. Fluid levels
between the “MIN” and “MAX” lines are within the normal operating range; there is
no
need to add fluid.
|
If the fluid levels
are
below the “MIN” mark, the performance of the systems could be compromised; the
brake/clutch
operation
could be spongy and gear change harder. Top-up the recommended brake/clutch fluid till
the
“MAX” mark or contact an Mahindra
Authorised Dealer immediately.
Carefully clean the
cap on
the reservoir before you remove it and be sure no debris fall in the reservoir. Do not
keep
the
reservoir open for longer than necessary to add brake fluid.
Use only brake/clutch
fluid
that meets Mahindra specifications.
Kindly refer the Warranty
and
Service Information Guide for Brake/Clutch Fluid capacity and grade.
Draining or changing of
brake
fluid should always be done by Mahindra Authorised Dealer.
11.7.7 Windshield Washer
Fluid
Top-up
Top-up the windshield washer reservoirs as and when required.
|
The windshield washer is located behind the RH
Head
lamp in the engine bay.
|
In very cold weather conditions, fill the reservoir with washer
fluid
premixed with anti-freeze.
If you operate your
vehicle in
very low temperatures, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. Failure to use washer
fluid with anti-freeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield
vision and
increase the risk of injury
or accident.
11.8 Maintenance -
Inside the Vehicle
Lights: Make sure the
Head
lights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights and other lights are all working. Check
headlight
aim.
Warning Messages and Lamps:
Check all warning lamps appearing in the instrument cluster. Refer to the relevant
sections in
this manual for further details.
Seats: Check that all
seat
controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches
lock
securely
in any position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks
hold
securely in any latched
position.
Seat Belts: Check
that the
seat belt system such as buckles, retractors and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make
sure the
belt
webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
Accelerator Pedal:
Check
the pedal for smooth operation, uneven pedal effort or stickiness. Check the foot well and
remove
obstructions, if any.
Brake/Clutch Pedal:
Check
the pedal for smooth operation and proper clearance. Check the foot well and remove
obstructions, if
any.
11.9 Maintenance -
Outside the Vehicle
The following checks should be carried out from time to time,
unless
otherwise specified.
Lamps: Check and
ensure
proper functioning of all exterior lamps.
Fluid Leaks: Check
the
engine compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you smell fuel vapor or
notice
any leak, have
the cause found and corrected immediately.
Doors and Engine Hood:
Check all doors and latches including the tailgate for proper functioning. Make sure the
engine
hood secondary latch secures
the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
Tyre Inflation Pressure:
Check the Tyre pressure with a pressure gauge every week.
11.10 Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a Mahindra genuine battery. For
longer,
trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery
clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery
terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the
cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. To
prevent corrosion, apply petroleum jelly to the battery terminals. Tighten loose terminals and hold
down
clamp nuts only enough
to keep the battery firmly in place. Tightening excessively may damage the battery terminals.
11.10.1 For Best Battery
Service
| • | Keep the battery securely mounted |
| • | Keep the battery top clean and dry |
| • | Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease |
| • | Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda |
Do not disconnect battery
terminals while the engine is running. This will adversely affect all electronic
controllers.
While removing the
battery,
always disconnect the negative terminal first. And while installing the battery, ensure
the
negative
terminal is connected last.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle
for an extended period of time. This will minimise the discharge of your battery during storage.
Battery fluid is a
corrosive
acid solution; do not allow battery acid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don't lean
over
battery
when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in the
eyes or
on the skin, flush contaminated
area immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates
hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep any flame or spark away from the vent
holes.
Keep batteries out of
reach of
children. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
components.
Wash hands after handling batteries.
If the battery has been
disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock (if equipped) and the preset
radio
(if
equipped) stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
The replacement battery
must
meet the specification of the originally fitted battery.
11.11 Wiper Blades
Lift the wiper arm from its position. Expose the blade lip for
inspection. Clean the wiper blade lips with water applied with
a soft sponge. If the wiper blade is not wiping the glass satisfactorily or is worn-out, cut,
cracked
or bulging, get it replaced
at an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.
11.11.1 Changing the
Wiper
Blade
| 1. | Lift the arm and position the wiper blade at
right
angles to the wiper arm.
 |
| 2. | Press the retaining clip in the opposite
direction, disengage the wiper blade and pull it off the arm.
 |
| 3. | Hold the end of the rubber and pull until the tabs are free of the metal support. |
| 4. | Carefully insert the new blade rubber. Then instal the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal. |
To prevent damage to
the
windshield, don’t let the wiper arm slap down on to it.
11.12 Appearance
Care
and Protection
11.12.1 Washing the
Exterior
| • | Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH soap |
| • | Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolour and spot painted surfaces |
| • | Never wash a vehicle that is ‘hot to the touch’ or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight |
| • | Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results |
| • | Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting |
| • | It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle |
| • | Immediately remove items such as Petrol, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits; they can cause damage to the vehicle's paint work and trim over time |
11.12.3 Exterior Chrome
| • | Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo |
| • | Use the custom bright metal cleaners, available at your Authorised Mahindra Dealer. Apply the product as you would wax to clean chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes, and then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag |
| • | Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can leave scratches on the chrome surface |
| • | After polishing the chrome parts, you can also apply a coating of Premium Liquid Wax, available at your Authorised Mahindra Dealer, or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects |
11.12.4 Paint Chips
| • | Authorised Mahindra Dealers have the exact touch-up paint to match your vehicle's colour |
| • | Take your vehicle to an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for paint touch-up or paint repairs |
| • | Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips |
| • | Always read the instructions before using the products |
11.12.5 Alloy Wheels and
Wheel
Covers (if equipped)
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat of
paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
| • | Clean weekly with wheel and Tyre cleaner, which is available at your Authorised Mahindra Dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water |
| • | Never apply any cleaning chemicals to hot or warm wheel rims or covers |
| • | Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents |
11.12.6 Plastic
(Non-painted)
Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These
products
are available with your Authorised Mahindra Dealer. You
can use these cleaners:
| • | For routine cleaning of plastic parts |
| • | For tar or grease spots |
| • | For plastic head lamp lenses |
11.12.7 Windows and Wiper
Blades
The front/rear windshield, side windows and the wiper blades
should
be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly,
substances on the vehicle's glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot
wax
treatments used by commercial
car washes, water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these
contaminants
may cause squeaking or
chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and smearing of the windshield.
To clean these items follow these tips:
| • | The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, available at your Authorised Mahindra Dealer |
| • | The wiper blades can be cleaned with alcohol or Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate, available at your Authorised Mahindra Dealer. This washer fluid contains a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly |
| • | Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches |
| • | Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any glass parts |
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the
glass
cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion,
clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth
with a
neutral detergent or mild-abrasive
cleaning solution. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water.
The
windshield is clean if beads
do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to remove
decals,
as it may cause damage to the glass or rear windshield
heater grid lines (if equipped).
11.12.8 Instrument
Panel/Interior Trim and Cluster Lens
Do not use chemical
solvents
or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Clean the instrument panel, interior trim areas and cluster
lens
with soap and water using soft microfibre / cotton cloth
/ sponge, then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth; you may also use Dash and Vinyl
Cleaner on
the instrument panel and
interior trim areas.
| • | Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection |
| • | Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens |
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on
the
instrument panel or on the interior trim surfaces, clean as
follows:
| • | Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth |
| • | Apply vinyl cleaner to the wiped area and spread around evenly |
| • | Apply cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area and allow this to set in at room temperature for 30 minutes |
| • | Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the area with a rubbing motion for 60 secs. |
| • | Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth |
11.12.9 Interior
Maintenance
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats:
| • | Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner |
| • | Remove light stains and soil with carpet and upholstery cleaner |
| • | If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with a stain remover |
| • | Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolour the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials |
| • | Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing |
11.12.10 Leather Seats
(if
equipped)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective
coating over
the leather:
| • | To clean, use a soft microfibre/cotton / sponge cloth with a leather and vinyl with approved cleaners. Dry the area with a soft cloth |
| • | To help maintain its resiliency and colour, use the leather care kit, available from an Authorised Mahindra Dealer |
| • | Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating |
In some instances, a
colour
or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery.
If this
occurs, clean the leather immediately to avoid permanent staining.
11.13 Air-Conditioning System Maintenance
Your vehicle's air-conditioning is a sealed system. Any major
maintenance, such as recharging should be done by a qualified
technician. However, you can do a few things by yourself to make sure the air-conditioning works
efficiently.
Run the air-conditioning system at least once a week, even
during the
cold weather months. Run it for at least ten minutes
with the engine running at normal operating temperature. This circulates the lubricating oil
contained
in the refrigerant.
Whenever you get the
air-conditioning system serviced, make sure the service facility uses a refrigerant
recycling
system.
This system captures the refrigerant for re-use. Releasing the refrigerant into the
atmosphere
may cause damage to the environment.
11.14 Vehicle Storage
If you are leaving your vehicle for more than 2 weeks, you may
want to
take stopping to protect your battery. Disconnect the
negative cable from the battery. Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.
vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air-conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air mode and
high
blower speed setting.
This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimise the possibility of compressor damage
when the
system is started again.
It is recommended storing the vehicle in a covered, clean, dry,
well
levelled, ventilated and closed place.
11.15 Winter Care
Dealing with Ice:
Make
sure you have window ice scrapers and de-icers for the locks. When you're stuck, having a small
shovel
is useful to
dig out of the snow. The weight of a bag of sand in the trunk will give added traction in
rear-wheel
drive vehicles and can
be used to sprinkle on the snow and ice to gain better traction. And don't forget personal
protection
such as a warm coat,
hat, gloves and a blanket, in case you get stuck in a storm.
Keep Enough Fuel in the
Tank:
Never let the fuel level in the tank drop below the half-full mark. A sudden storm with
unexpected heavy rains could leave
you stranded for hours. Having adequate fuel supply will allow you to idle the engine from time
to
time to keep warm.
Do not: Tap the ice
on the
window to crack it or chip it for a good place to start scraping. You could end up cracking more
than
the ice and end up with a cracked or shattered windshield/window
Pour warm or hot water on the windshield to melt ice. This will
crack
your windshield
During Winter Storage:
Start the engine occasionally, here are a few pointers to keep in mind:
| • | Run it in a well-ventilated area. Carbon monoxide can build up quickly |
| • | Run for a minimum of 20 minutes to allow the engine to come up to the normal operating temperature. This will allow the oil to circulate and will also open up the thermostat so that your radiator anti-freeze circulates as well |
| • | Start up the air conditioner and/or heater and run both for about 10 minute. Again, circulating fluids is essential for good life of the system |
Exterior: Wash and
wax
your car to provide an extra layer of protection to your paint.
Vinyl and Rubber: Use
a
good conditioner on all vinyl and rubber parts to prevent from drying out.
Interior: Clean the
glass,
shampoo the carpets, dig in between the seats to see what's there, clean the upholstery in all
nooks
and
corners.
Engine: Check all
hoses
and wires to make sure everything is in good condition and replace any that need to be. The last
thing
to
do is to make sure the internal components of the engine remain lubricated and don't corrode.
If the engine is being
started
after a very long period of non-use, warm up the engine at an idle speed for 2-3 minutes
before
driving the vehicle.
11.16 Bulb Replacements
11.16.1 Head Lamp Bulb
Replacement
The head lamp bulb can
be
replaced without removing the head lamp assembly from the vehicle.
To replace the head lamp bulb:
| • | Ensure ignition is switched OFF |
| • | Remove rear dust cover from the head lamp |
| • | Remove the bulb assembly with connector from the head lamp by unlocking the wire clamp |
| • | Detach the bulb assembly from the wiring connector near to the head lamp |
| • | Insert the connector into the new bulb (of the same wattage), and follow the reverse procedure to assemble the bulb assembly in the headlight assembly |
| • | Clamp the bulb assembly by wire clamp properly |
Do not touch the new
bulb
with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes
in
contact
with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
To avoid burning
yourself,
do not replace the light bulbs when they are hot. Halogen bulbs have pressurised gas
inside
and
are to be handled with special care. Mishandling it may cause the bulb to burst or
shatter.
Hold the bulb with its metal/plastic
holder/base and do not touch the glass part with bare hands.
Using bulbs with units
of
higher output capacity/wattage is illegal and may damage your vehicle’s electrical
system.
Replacement bulbs must
meet
the specification of originally fitted bulbs.
11.17 Projector Head Lamp (if
equipped)
|
A
|
Turn signal lamp
|
C
|
Headlamp (High beam)
|
|
B
|
Tail lamp/(DRL)
|
D
|
Headlamp (Low beam)
|
Do not touch the new bulb
with
your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact
with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
To avoid burning yourself,
do not
replace the light bulbs when they are hot. Halogen bulbs have pressurised gas inside and
are to be handled with special care. Mishandling it may cause the bulb to burst or shatter.
Hold
the bulb with its metal/plastic
holder/base and do not touch the glass part with bare hands.
Using bulbs with units of
higher
output capacity/wattage is illegal and may damage your vehicle’s electrical system.
Replacement
bulbs must meet the specification of originally fitted bulbs.
11.18 Service Reminder Alert (if
equipped)
Service reminder alert will be displayed in instrument cluster
indicating
that the next scheduled service is due. Alert will
be active when ignition is turned ON before 200 km of every service schedule.
Alert will be reset by Mahindra Authorised Service Dealer after
completion of every service.
12 ANNEXURE
12.1 Emission Control System –
Multi
Languages Alerts
